summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2024-07-14 20:14:08 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2024-07-14 20:14:08 +0000
commitb78a525060cf1ff47052f4f6757f00a9a3e8f867 (patch)
treed8195e8c4587c10673c0e4ba87597b1e0ff52b31 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex
parent7dfb9e87da2cae3811e28b3cd9ec7771cc59490d (diff)
cjs-rcs-article (14jul24)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@71799 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdfbin112323 -> 120472 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex5
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdfbin176709 -> 190173 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj611
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj603
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs420
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs370
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs8009
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdfbin38737 -> 38874 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex21
13 files changed, 28 insertions, 10081 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md
index 69c983dbb73..e28620a02d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md
@@ -16,11 +16,12 @@ compatible with the traditional engine pdfLaTeX.
## Licence
LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c or (at your option) any
-later version.
+later version. The documentation is also licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0
+International.
## Version
-1.0 (2023-11-29)
+
## Author
@@ -103,7 +104,7 @@ version history of the bibliographic styles appears in
## Comments or suggestions
-The Gitlab [project repository](https://gitlab.com/cjs-rcs/cjs-rcs-article)
+The GitLab [project repository](https://gitlab.com/cjs-rcs/cjs-rcs-article)
is the best place to report bugs or to propose improvements to the
project.
@@ -127,11 +128,12 @@ grande partie compatible avec le moteur pdfLaTeX.
## Licence
LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c ou (à votre choix) toute
-version ultérieure.
+version ultérieure. La documentation est également publiée sous
+licence CC BY-SA 4.0 International.
## Version
-1.0 (2023-11-29)
+
## Auteur
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf
index 5ec31c2669c..c64b7fa0a24 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index b7f01a64fda..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-%% Wrapper to set language to French
-%% (https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/28646).
-\expandafter\newif\csname ifenglish\endcsname
-\englishfalse
-\input{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf
index dc76f9053ec..4d9c8ae4f8d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj
deleted file mode 100644
index 38907626da6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,611 +0,0 @@
-%% Driver file to produce cjs-rcs-en.bst from cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs
-%% Originally generated with makebst, version 4.1 (2003/09/08),
-%% on 2023/10/05 at 15:25, then hand edited by Vincent Goulet.
-%%
-\input docstrip
-
-\preamble
-
-Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-canadienne de statistique
-
-This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-of this license is in:
-
- https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-
-This work consists of the master bibliographic style file
-cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs, the language definition file cjs-rcs-english.mbs,
-the driver file cjs-rcs-en.dbj, and the derived file cjs-rcs-en.bst.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\postamble
-End of customized bst file
-\endpostamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\askforoverwritefalse
-\def\MBopts{\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{%
-%EXTERNAL FILES:
-%Name of language file: \cfile=cjs-rcs-english.mbs.
-%No included files.
- head,\MBopta}
-\from{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}{\MBopta}
-\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
-\def\MBopta{%
-%INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT (if no external language file)
-% %: (def) English
-% babel,%: Babel
-%--------------------
- exlang,%: External language file
-%STYLE OF CITATIONS:
-% %: (def) Numerical
- ay,%: Author-year
-% alph,%: Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90
-% alph,alf-1,%: Alpha style, Jon90
-% alph,alf-f,%: Alpha style, Jones90
-% cite,%: Cite key
-%--------------------
-%HTML OUTPUT (if non author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Normal LaTeX
-% html,%: Hypertext
-% html,htlist,%: Hypertext list
-% html,htdes,%: Hypertext with keys
-%--------------------
-%AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM (if author-year citations)
- nat,%: Natbib
-% %: (def) Older Natbib
-% alk,%: Apalike
-% har,%: Harvard
-% ast,%: Astronomy
-% cay,%: Chicago
-% nmd,%: Named
-% cn,%: Author-date
-%--------------------
-%HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED (if Harvard support selected)
-% harnm,%: With Harvard extensions
-% %: (def) Older Harvard
-%--------------------
-%LANGUAGE FIELD
-% %: (def) No language field
- lang,%: Add language field
-%--------------------
-%ANNOTATIONS:
- %: (def) No annotations
-% annote,%: Annotations
-%--------------------
-%PRESENTATIONS:
- %: (def) Do not add presentation type
-% pres,%: Add presentation, speaker not highlighted
-% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face
-% pres,pres-it,%: Presentaion, speaker italic
-% pres,pres-sc,%: Presentaion, speaker in small caps
-%--------------------
-%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if non-author/year and non-alph)
-% %: (def) Alphabetical
-% seq-no,%: Citation order
-% seq-yr,%: Year ordered
-% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered
-%--------------------
-%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Alphabetical
-% seq-lab,%: By label
-% seq-labc,%: By label and cite order
-% seq-key,%: By label and cite key
-% seq-yr,%: Year ordered
-% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered
-% seq-no,%: Citation order
-%--------------------
-%ORDER ON VON PART (if not citation order)
- %: (def) Sort on von part
-% vonx,%: Sort without von part
-%--------------------
-%IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Respect first names
-% xintls,%: Sort on surname only
-%--------------------
-%AUTHOR NAMES:
-% ed-au,%: Full, surname last
-% nm-revf,%: Full, surname first
-% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname
- nm-rev,%: Surname + initials
-% nm-rv,%: Surname + dotless initials
-% nm-rvvc,%: Surname + comma + spaceless initials
-% nm-rvx,%: Surname + pure initials
-% nm-rvcx,%: Surname + comma + pure initials
-% nm-rvv,%: Surname + spaceless initials
-% nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials
-% nm-revv1,%: First name reversed, with full names
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS (if author names reversed)
- %: (def) Editor names NOT reversed
-% ed-rev,%: Editor names reversed
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF JUNIOR (if author names reversed)
- jnrlst,%: Junior comes last
-% %: (def) Junior between
-%--------------------
-%JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) No `junior' part in the citations
-% jnrlab,%: `Junior' in citations
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:
- %: (def) Author names separated by commas
-% aunm-semi,%: Names separated by semi-colon
-% aunm-sl,%: Names separated by slash
-%--------------------
-%ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:
- %: (def) Author/editor names always present
-% nmdash,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash
-% nmdash,nmd-2,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes
-% nmdash,nmd-3,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes
-%--------------------
-%NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:
- %: (def) All authors
-% nmlm,%: Limited authors
-%--------------------
-%AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:
- %: (def) One author et al
-% mcite,%: Some other truncation scheme
-%--------------------
-%MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)
-% mct-1,%: One et al
-% mct-2,%: One, Two et al
-% mct-3,%: One, Two, Three et al
-% mct-4,%: One, Two, Three, Four et al
-% mct-5,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al
-% mct-6,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al
-%--------------------
-%MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)
-% mct-x2,%: Two authors without truncating
-% mct-x3,%: Three authors
-% mct-x4,%: Four authors
-% mct-x5,%: Five authors
-% mct-x6,%: Six authors
-%--------------------
-%TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:
- %: (def) Normal font for author names
-% nmft,nmft-sc,%: Small caps authors
-% nmft,nmft-it,%: Italic authors
-% nmft,nmft-bf,%: Bold authors
-% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR FIRST NAMES (if non-default font for authors)
-% %: (def) First names same font as surnames
-% fnm-rm,%: First names in normal font
-% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:
-% %: (def) Editors incollection normal font
-% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:
-% %: (def) `And' in author font
-% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Cited authors plain
-% lab,lab-it,%: Cited authors italic
-% lab,lab-sc,%: Cited authors small caps
-% lab,lab-bf,%: Cited authors bold
-% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS (if non-default font for citation lables)
-% %: (def) Cited `and' in author font
-% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF EXTRA LABEL (The extra letter on the year)
- %: (def) Extra label plain
-% xlab-it,%: Extra label italic
-%--------------------
-%LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING (if author-year citations)
- keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author
-% %: (def) Year included when KEY replaces missing author
-%--------------------
-%MISSING DATE (if author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Missing date set to ????
- blkyear,%: Missing date left blank
-%--------------------
-%DATE POSITION:
-% %: (def) Date at end
- dt-beg,%: Date after authors
-% dt-jnl,%: Date part of journal spec.
-% dt-end,%: Date at very end
-%--------------------
-%DATE FORMAT (if non author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Plain month and year
-% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses
-% yr-brk,%: Date in brackets
-% yr-col,%: Date preceded by colon
-% yr-per,%: Date preceded by period
-% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma
-% yr-blk,%: Date preceded by space
-%--------------------
-%SUPPRESS MONTH:
-% %: (def) Date is month and year
-% xmth,%: Date is year only
-%--------------------
-%REVERSED DATE (if including month)
-% %: (def) Date as month year
-% dtrev,%: Date as year month
-%--------------------
-%DATE FORMAT (if author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Year plain
- yr-par,%: Year in parentheses
-% yr-brk,%: Year in brackets
-% yr-col,%: Year preceded by colon
-% yr-per,%: Year preceded by period
-% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma
-% yr-blk,%: Year preceded by space
-%--------------------
-%INCLUDE MONTHS:
- %: (def) Date is year only
-% aymth,%: Include month in date
-%--------------------
-%REVERSED DATE (if including month)
-% %: (def) Date as month year
-% dtrev,%: Date as year month
-%--------------------
-%DATE PUNCTUATION (if date not at end)
-% %: (def) Date with standard block punctuation
-% yrp-col,%: Colon after date
-% yrp-semi,%: Semi-colon after date
- yrp-per,%: Period after date
-% yrp-x,%: No punct. after date
-%--------------------
-%BLANK AFTER DATE:
- %: (def) Space after date
-% yrpp-xsp,%: No space after date
-%--------------------
-%DATE FONT:
- %: (def) Date in normal font
-% dtbf,%: Date in bold face
-%--------------------
-%TRUNCATE YEAR (if author-year citations)
- note-yr,%: Year text full
-% %: (def) Year truncated
-%--------------------
-%TITLE OF ARTICLE:
- %: (def) Title plain
-% tit-it,%: Title italic
-% tit-qq,qt-s,%: Title and punctuation in single quotes
-% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes
-% tit-qq,qt-g,%: Title and punctuation in guillemets
-% tit-qq,qt-s,qx,%: Title in single quotes
-% tit-qq,qx,%: Title in double quotes
-% tit-qq,qt-g,qx,%: Title in guillemets
-%--------------------
-%COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title)
-% bt-qq,%: Quote collection and proceedings titles
-% %: (def) Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes
-%--------------------
-%CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:
- %: (def) Sentence style
-% atit-u,%: Title style
-%--------------------
-%ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:
- %: (def) Article title present
-% jtit-x,%: No article title
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAMES:
- %: (def) Periods in journal names
-% jxper,%: Dotless journal names
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAME FONT:
- %: (def) Journal name italics
-% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal
-%--------------------
-%THESIS TITLE:
- %: (def) Thesis titles like books
-% thtit-a,%: Thesis title like article
-% thtit-x,%: No thesis title
-%--------------------
-%TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:
-% %: (def) Tech. report title like articles
- trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books
-%--------------------
-%TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:
- %: (def) Tech. report and number plain
-% trnum-it,%: Tech. report and number italic
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL VOLUME:
- %: (def) Volume plain
-% vol-it,%: Volume italic
-% vol-bf,%: Volume bold
-% vol-2bf,%: Volume and number bold
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:
- %: (def) Journal vol(num)
-% vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num)
-% vnum-cm,%: Journal vol, num
-% vnum-nr,%: Journal vol, no. num
-% vnum-h,%: Journal vol, \# number
-% vnum-b,%: Journal vol number
-% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number
-%--------------------
-%VOLUME PUNCTUATION:
- %: (def) Volume with colon
-% volp-sp,%: Volume with colon and space
-% volp-semi,%: Volume with semi-colon
-% volp-com,%: Volume with comma
-% volp-blk,%: Volume with blank
-%--------------------
-%YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:
- %: (def) Journal year like others
-% jdt-v,%: Journal vol(year)
-% jdt-vs,%: Journal vol (year)
-% jdt-p,%: Year with pages
-% jdt-pc,%: Year, comma, pages
-%--------------------
-%PAGE NUMBERS:
- %: (def) Start and stop page numbers
-% jpg-1,%: Only start page number
-%--------------------
-%LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:
- %: (def) No separators for large page numbers
-% pgsep-c,%: Comma inserted over 9999
-% pgsep-s,%: Thin space inserted over 9999
-% pgsep-p,%: Period inserted over 9999
-%--------------------
-%WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:
- %: (def) Article pages numbers only
-% jwdpg,%: Include `page' in articles
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF PAGES:
- %: (def) Pages given mid text
-% pp-last,%: Pages at end
-%--------------------
-%WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:
- %: (def) Article volume as number only
-% jwdvol,%: Include `volume' in articles
-%--------------------
-%NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:
- num-xser,%: Allows number without series
-% %: (def) Standard BibTeX
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:
-% %: (def) After chapter and pages
- numser,%: Just before publisher
-%--------------------
-%VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:
- %: (def) Vol. 23 of Series
-% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:
-% %: (def) Series and volume after the editors
- ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:
- %: (def) Comma after journal
-% jnm-x,%: Space after journal
-%--------------------
-%BOOK TITLE:
- %: (def) Book title italic
-% btit-rm,bt-rm,%: Book title plain
-%--------------------
-%PAGES IN BOOKS:
- %: (def) Pages in book plain
-% bkpg-par,%: Pages in book in parentheses
-% bkpg-x,%: Pages in book bare
-%--------------------
-%TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:
- %: (def) Total book pages not printed
-% pg-bk,%: For book: 345 pages
-% pg-bk,pg-pre,%: Total book pages before publisher
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER ADDRESS:
- %: (def) Publisher, address
-% add-pub,%: Address: Publisher
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:
- %: (def) Publisher as normal block
-% pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses
-% pub-date,%: Publisher and date in parentheses
-% pub-date,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma
-% pub-date,pub-xpar,%: Publisher and date without parentheses
-% pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER POSITION:
-% %: (def) Publisher after chapter, pages
-% pre-pub,%: Publisher before chapter, pages
- pre-edn,%: Publisher after edition
-%--------------------
-%ISBN NUMBER:
- isbn,%: Include ISBN
-% %: (def) No ISBN
-%--------------------
-%ISSN NUMBER:
-% issn,%: Include ISSN
- %: (def) No ISSN
-%--------------------
-%DOI NUMBER:
-% doi,%: Include DOI
- url-doi,%: Format DOI as URL //dx.doi.org/doi
-% agu-doi,doi,%: Insert DOI AGU style
-% %: (def) No DOI
-%--------------------
-%`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):
- %: (def) Word `editor' after name
-% edpar,%: `Name (editor),'
-% edpar,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor),'
-% edparc,%: `Name, (editor)'
-% edparc,bkedcap,%: `Name, (Editor)'
-% edparxc,%: `Name (editor)'
-% edparxc,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor)'
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:
- %: (def) Same as for edited book
-% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..
-% edby-par,%: In booktitle (edited by ..)
-% edby-parc,%: In booktitle, (edited by ..)
-% edby,edbyx,%: In booktitle, editor ..
-% edby,edbyw,%: In booktitle, (editor) ..
-% edby-par,edbyx,%: In booktitle (editor..)
-% edby-parc,edbyx,%: In booktitle, (editor..)
-% edby,edbyy,%: In booktitle, .., editor
-% edby-par,edbyy,%: In booktitle (.., editor)
-%--------------------
-%CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable)
-% %: (def) `(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'
-% edcap,%: `(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):
- %: (def) \newblock after blocks
-% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks
-% blk-com,com-semi,%: Semi-colon between blocks
-% blk-com,com-blank,%: Blanks between blocks
-% blk-tit,%: Period after titles of articles, books, etc
-% blk-tit,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles, books, etc
-% blk-tita,%: Period after titles of articles
-% blk-tita,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \newblock)
-% %: (def) Notes have regular punctuation
-% blknt,%: Notes preceded by period
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:
- %: (def) Author block normal
-% au-col,%: Author block with colon
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':
- %: (def) Space after `in'
-% in-col,%: Colon after `in'
-% in-it,%: Italic `in'
-% in-col,in-it,%: Italic `in' and colon
-% in-x,%: No word `in'
-%--------------------
-%`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections)
- %: (def) No `in' before journal name
-% injnl,%: Add `in' before journal name
-%--------------------
-%FINAL PUNCTUATION:
- %: (def) Period at very end
-% fin-bare,%: No period at end
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file)
-% %: (def) `Page(s)'
-% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated
-% ppx,%: `Page' omitted
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':
-% %: (def) `Editor(s)'
-% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated
-%--------------------
-%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:
-% %: (def) No abbreviations
-% abr,%: Abbreviations
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words)
-% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn'
-% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed'
-%--------------------
-%MONTHS WITH DOTS:
-% %: (def) Months with dots
-% mth-bare,%: Months without dots
-%--------------------
-%EDITION NUMBERS:
-% xedn,%: Editions as in database
-% %: (def) Write out editions
-% ord,%: Numerical editions
-%--------------------
-%Reading external language file \cfile=cjs-rcs-english.mbs
- english,%: English language
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'
- %: (def) `Page(s)'
-% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated
-% ppx,%: `Page' omitted
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':
- %: (def) `Editor(s)'
-% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated
-%--------------------
-%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:
-% %: (def) No abbreviations
- abr,%: Abbreviations
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words)
-% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn'
- ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed'
-%--------------------
-%MONTHS WITH DOTS:
- %: (def) Months with dots
-% mth-bare,%: Months without dots
-%--------------------
-%EDITION NUMBERS:
-% xedn,%: Editions as in database
-% %: (def) Write out editions
- ord,%: Numerical editions
-%--------------------
-%STORED JOURNAL NAMES:
- %: (def) Full journal names
-% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names
-% jabr,jaa,%: Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands
-%--------------------
-%AMPERSAND:
- %: (def) Use word `and'
-% amper,%: Use ampersand
-% varand,%: Use \BIBand
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `AND':
- %: (def) Comma before `and'
-% and-xcom,%: No comma before `and'
-% and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors)
-% and-com-ed,%: Comma with 2 editors
-% %: (def) Two editors without comma
-%--------------------
-%NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:
- %: (def) With `and'
-% xand,%: No `and'
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':
-% %: (def) Comma before `et al'
- etal-xc,%: No comma before `et al'
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF `ET AL':
- %: (def) Plain et al
-% etal-it,%: Italic et al
-% etal-rm,%: Roman et al
-%--------------------
-%ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:
- %: (def) No additional fields
-% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,%: Include REVTeX data fields
-%--------------------
-%E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields)
- %: (def) Do not include eprint field
-% eprint,%: Include eprint and archive fields
-%--------------------
-%URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields)
-% %: (def) No URL
- url,url-blk,%: Include URL
-% url,url-nt,%: URL as note
-% url,url-nl,%: URL on new line
-%--------------------
-%REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:
- %: (def) No reference component tags
-% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags
-%--------------------
-%EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics)
- %: (def) Use emphasis
-% em-it,%: Use true italics
-% em-x,%: No italics
-% em-ul,%: Underlining
-%--------------------
-%COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:
- nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands
-% plntx,%: Use only Plain TeX
-%--------------------
-,{%
- }}
-\generate{\file{cjs-rcs-en.bst}{\MBopts}}
-\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ae793cf2bf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,603 +0,0 @@
-%% Driver file to produce cjs-rcs-fr.bst from cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs
-%% Originally generated with makebst, version 4.1 (2003/09/08),
-%% on 2023/10/11 at 12:01, then hand edited by Vincent Goulet.
-%%
-\input docstrip
-
-\preamble
-
-Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-canadienne de statistique
-
-This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-of this license is in:
-
- https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-
-This work consists of the master bibliographic style file
-cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs, the language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs,
-the driver file cjs-rcs-fr.dbj, and the derived file cjs-rcs-fr.bst.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\postamble
-End of customized bst file
-\endpostamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\askforoverwritefalse
-\def\MBopts{\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{%
-%EXTERNAL FILES:
-%Name of language file: \cfile=cjs-rcs-french.mbs.
-%No included files.
- head,\MBopta}
-\from{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}{\MBopta}
-\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
-\def\MBopta{%
-%INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT (if no external language file)
-% %: (def) English
-% babel,%: Babel
-%--------------------
- exlang,%: External language file
-%STYLE OF CITATIONS:
-% %: (def) Numerical
- ay,%: Author-year
-% alph,%: Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90
-% alph,alf-1,%: Alpha style, Jon90
-% alph,alf-f,%: Alpha style, Jones90
-% cite,%: Cite key
-%--------------------
-%HTML OUTPUT (if non author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Normal LaTeX
-% html,%: Hypertext
-% html,htlist,%: Hypertext list
-% html,htdes,%: Hypertext with keys
-%--------------------
-%AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM (if author-year citations)
- nat,%: Natbib
-% %: (def) Older Natbib
-% alk,%: Apalike
-% har,%: Harvard
-% ast,%: Astronomy
-% cay,%: Chicago
-% nmd,%: Named
-% cn,%: Author-date
-%--------------------
-%HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED (if Harvard support selected)
-% harnm,%: With Harvard extensions
-% %: (def) Older Harvard
-%--------------------
-%LANGUAGE FIELD
-% %: (def) No language field
- lang,%: Add language field
-%--------------------
-%ANNOTATIONS:
- %: (def) No annotations
-% annote,%: Annotations
-%--------------------
-%PRESENTATIONS:
- %: (def) Do not add presentation type
-% pres,%: Add presentation, speaker not highlighted
-% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face
-% pres,pres-it,%: Presentaion, speaker italic
-% pres,pres-sc,%: Presentaion, speaker in small caps
-%--------------------
-%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if non-author/year and non-alph)
-% %: (def) Alphabetical
-% seq-no,%: Citation order
-% seq-yr,%: Year ordered
-% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered
-%--------------------
-%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Alphabetical
-% seq-lab,%: By label
-% seq-labc,%: By label and cite order
-% seq-key,%: By label and cite key
-% seq-yr,%: Year ordered
-% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered
-% seq-no,%: Citation order
-%--------------------
-%ORDER ON VON PART (if not citation order)
-% %: (def) Sort on von part
- vonx,%: Sort without von part
-%--------------------
-%IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Respect first names
-% xintls,%: Sort on surname only
-%--------------------
-%AUTHOR NAMES:
-% ed-au,%: Full, surname last
-% nm-revf,%: Full, surname first
-% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname
-% nm-rev,%: Surname + initials
-% nm-rv,%: Surname + dotless initials
-% nm-rvvc,%: Surname + comma + spaceless initials
-% nm-rvx,%: Surname + pure initials
-% nm-rvcx,%: Surname + comma + pure initials
-% nm-rvv,%: Surname + spaceless initials
- nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials
-% nm-revv1,%: First name reversed, with full names
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS (if author names reversed)
- %: (def) Editor names NOT reversed
-% ed-rev,%: Editor names reversed
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF JUNIOR (if author names reversed)
- jnrlst,%: Junior comes last
-% %: (def) Junior between
-%--------------------
-%JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) No `junior' part in the citations
-% jnrlab,%: `Junior' in citations
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:
- %: (def) Author names separated by commas
-% aunm-semi,%: Names separated by semi-colon
-% aunm-sl,%: Names separated by slash
-%--------------------
-%ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:
- %: (def) Author/editor names always present
-% nmdash,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash
-% nmdash,nmd-2,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes
-% nmdash,nmd-3,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes
-%--------------------
-%NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:
- %: (def) All authors
-% nmlm,%: Limited authors
-%--------------------
-%AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:
- %: (def) One author et al
-% mcite,%: Some other truncation scheme
-%--------------------
-%MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)
-% mct-1,%: One et al
-% mct-2,%: One, Two et al
-% mct-3,%: One, Two, Three et al
-% mct-4,%: One, Two, Three, Four et al
-% mct-5,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al
-% mct-6,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al
-%--------------------
-%MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)
-% mct-x2,%: Two authors without truncating
-% mct-x3,%: Three authors
-% mct-x4,%: Four authors
-% mct-x5,%: Five authors
-% mct-x6,%: Six authors
-%--------------------
-%TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:
- %: (def) Normal font for author names
-% nmft,nmft-sc,%: Small caps authors
-% nmft,nmft-it,%: Italic authors
-% nmft,nmft-bf,%: Bold authors
-% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR FIRST NAMES (if non-default font for authors)
-% %: (def) First names same font as surnames
-% fnm-rm,%: First names in normal font
-% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:
-% %: (def) Editors incollection normal font
-% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:
-% %: (def) `And' in author font
-% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT (if author-year citations)
- %: (def) Cited authors plain
-% lab,lab-it,%: Cited authors italic
-% lab,lab-sc,%: Cited authors small caps
-% lab,lab-bf,%: Cited authors bold
-% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font
-%--------------------
-%FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS (if non-default font for citation lables)
-% %: (def) Cited `and' in author font
-% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF EXTRA LABEL (The extra letter on the year)
- %: (def) Extra label plain
-% xlab-it,%: Extra label italic
-%--------------------
-%LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING (if author-year citations)
- keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author
-% %: (def) Year included when KEY replaces missing author
-%--------------------
-%MISSING DATE (if author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Missing date set to ????
- blkyear,%: Missing date left blank
-%--------------------
-%DATE POSITION:
-% %: (def) Date at end
- dt-beg,%: Date after authors
-% dt-jnl,%: Date part of journal spec.
-% dt-end,%: Date at very end
-%--------------------
-%DATE FORMAT (if non author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Plain month and year
-% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses
-% yr-brk,%: Date in brackets
-% yr-col,%: Date preceded by colon
-% yr-per,%: Date preceded by period
-% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma
-% yr-blk,%: Date preceded by space
-%--------------------
-%SUPPRESS MONTH:
-% %: (def) Date is month and year
-% xmth,%: Date is year only
-%--------------------
-%REVERSED DATE (if including month)
-% %: (def) Date as month year
-% dtrev,%: Date as year month
-%--------------------
-%DATE FORMAT (if author-year citations)
-% %: (def) Year plain
-% yr-par,%: Year in parentheses
-% yr-brk,%: Year in brackets
-% yr-col,%: Year preceded by colon
- yr-per,%: Year preceded by period
-% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma
-% yr-blk,%: Year preceded by space
-%--------------------
-%INCLUDE MONTHS:
- %: (def) Date is year only
-% aymth,%: Include month in date
-%--------------------
-%REVERSED DATE (if including month)
-% %: (def) Date as month year
-% dtrev,%: Date as year month
-%--------------------
-%DATE PUNCTUATION (if date not at end)
- %: (def) Date with standard block punctuation
-% yrp-col,%: Colon after date
-% yrp-semi,%: Semi-colon after date
-% yrp-per,%: Period after date
-% yrp-x,%: No punct. after date
-%--------------------
-%BLANK AFTER DATE:
- %: (def) Space after date
-% yrpp-xsp,%: No space after date
-%--------------------
-%DATE FONT:
- %: (def) Date in normal font
-% dtbf,%: Date in bold face
-%--------------------
-%TRUNCATE YEAR (if author-year citations)
- note-yr,%: Year text full
-% %: (def) Year truncated
-%--------------------
-%TITLE OF ARTICLE:
-% %: (def) Title plain
-% tit-it,%: Title italic
-% tit-qq,qt-s,%: Title and punctuation in single quotes
-% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes
-% tit-qq,qt-g,%: Title and punctuation in guillemets
-% tit-qq,qt-s,qx,%: Title in single quotes
-% tit-qq,qx,%: Title in double quotes
- tit-qq,qt-g,qx,%: Title in guillemets
-%--------------------
-%COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title)
-% bt-qq,%: Quote collection and proceedings titles
- %: (def) Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes
-%--------------------
-%CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:
- %: (def) Sentence style
-% atit-u,%: Title style
-%--------------------
-%ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:
- %: (def) Article title present
-% jtit-x,%: No article title
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAMES:
- %: (def) Periods in journal names
-% jxper,%: Dotless journal names
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAME FONT:
- %: (def) Journal name italics
-% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal
-%--------------------
-%THESIS TITLE:
- %: (def) Thesis titles like books
-% thtit-a,%: Thesis title like article
-% thtit-x,%: No thesis title
-%--------------------
-%TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:
-% %: (def) Tech. report title like articles
- trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books
-%--------------------
-%TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:
- %: (def) Tech. report and number plain
-% trnum-it,%: Tech. report and number italic
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL VOLUME:
- %: (def) Volume plain
-% vol-it,%: Volume italic
-% vol-bf,%: Volume bold
-% vol-2bf,%: Volume and number bold
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:
-% %: (def) Journal vol(num)
-% vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num)
-% vnum-cm,%: Journal vol, num
- vnum-nr,%: Journal vol, no. num
-% vnum-h,%: Journal vol, \# number
-% vnum-b,%: Journal vol number
-% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number
-%--------------------
-%VOLUME PUNCTUATION:
-% %: (def) Volume with colon
-% volp-sp,%: Volume with colon and space
-% volp-semi,%: Volume with semi-colon
- volp-com,%: Volume with comma
-% volp-blk,%: Volume with blank
-%--------------------
-%YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:
- %: (def) Journal year like others
-% jdt-v,%: Journal vol(year)
-% jdt-vs,%: Journal vol (year)
-% jdt-p,%: Year with pages
-% jdt-pc,%: Year, comma, pages
-%--------------------
-%PAGE NUMBERS:
- %: (def) Start and stop page numbers
-% jpg-1,%: Only start page number
-%--------------------
-%LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:
-% %: (def) No separators for large page numbers
-% pgsep-c,%: Comma inserted over 9999
- pgsep-s,%: Thin space inserted over 9999
-% pgsep-p,%: Period inserted over 9999
-%--------------------
-%WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:
-% %: (def) Article pages numbers only
- jwdpg,%: Include `page' in articles
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF PAGES:
- %: (def) Pages given mid text
-% pp-last,%: Pages at end
-%--------------------
-%WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:
-% %: (def) Article volume as number only
- jwdvol,%: Include `volume' in articles
-%--------------------
-%NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:
- num-xser,%: Allows number without series
-% %: (def) Standard BibTeX
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:
-% %: (def) After chapter and pages
- numser,%: Just before publisher
-%--------------------
-%VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:
-% %: (def) Vol. 23 of Series
- ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
-%--------------------
-%POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:
-% %: (def) Series and volume after the editors
- ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle
-%--------------------
-%JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:
- %: (def) Comma after journal
-% jnm-x,%: Space after journal
-%--------------------
-%BOOK TITLE:
- %: (def) Book title italic
-% btit-rm,bt-rm,%: Book title plain
-%--------------------
-%PAGES IN BOOKS:
- %: (def) Pages in book plain
-% bkpg-par,%: Pages in book in parentheses
-% bkpg-x,%: Pages in book bare
-%--------------------
-%TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:
-% %: (def) Total book pages not printed
- pg-bk,%: For book: 345 pages
-% pg-bk,pg-pre,%: Total book pages before publisher
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER ADDRESS:
- %: (def) Publisher, address
-% add-pub,%: Address: Publisher
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:
- %: (def) Publisher as normal block
-% pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses
-% pub-date,%: Publisher and date in parentheses
-% pub-date,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma
-% pub-date,pub-xpar,%: Publisher and date without parentheses
-% pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma
-%--------------------
-%PUBLISHER POSITION:
-% %: (def) Publisher after chapter, pages
- pre-pub,%: Publisher before chapter, pages
- pre-edn,%: Publisher after edition
-%--------------------
-%ISBN NUMBER:
- isbn,%: Include ISBN
-% %: (def) No ISBN
-%--------------------
-%ISSN NUMBER:
-% issn,%: Include ISSN
- %: (def) No ISSN
-%--------------------
-%DOI NUMBER:
-% doi,%: Include DOI
- url-doi,%: Format DOI as URL //doi.org/doi
-% agu-doi,doi,%: Insert DOI AGU style
-% %: (def) No DOI
-%--------------------
-%`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):
-% %: (def) Word `editor' after name
-% edpar,%: `Name (editor),'
-% edpar,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor),'
-% edparc,%: `Name, (editor)'
-% edparc,bkedcap,%: `Name, (Editor)'
- edparxc,%: `Name (editor)'
-% edparxc,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor)'
-%--------------------
-%EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:
-% %: (def) Same as for edited book
- edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..
-% edby-par,%: In booktitle (edited by ..)
-% edby-parc,%: In booktitle, (edited by ..)
-% edby,edbyx,%: In booktitle, editor ..
-% edby,edbyw,%: In booktitle, (editor) ..
-% edby-par,edbyx,%: In booktitle (editor..)
-% edby-parc,edbyx,%: In booktitle, (editor..)
-% edby,edbyy,%: In booktitle, .., editor
-% edby-par,edbyy,%: In booktitle (.., editor)
-%--------------------
-%CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable)
-% %: (def) `(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'
-% edcap,%: `(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):
-% %: (def) \newblock after blocks
- blk-com,%: Comma between blocks
-% blk-com,com-semi,%: Semi-colon between blocks
-% blk-com,com-blank,%: Blanks between blocks
-% blk-tit,%: Period after titles of articles, books, etc
-% blk-tit,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles, books, etc
-% blk-tita,%: Period after titles of articles
-% blk-tita,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \newblock)
-% %: (def) Notes have regular punctuation
- blknt,%: Notes preceded by period
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:
- %: (def) Author block normal
-% au-col,%: Author block with colon
-%--------------------
-%PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':
- %: (def) Space after `in'
-% in-col,%: Colon after `in'
-% in-it,%: Italic `in'
-% in-col,in-it,%: Italic `in' and colon
-% in-x,%: No word `in'
-%--------------------
-%`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections)
- %: (def) No `in' before journal name
-% injnl,%: Add `in' before journal name
-%--------------------
-%FINAL PUNCTUATION:
- %: (def) Period at very end
-% fin-bare,%: No period at end
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file)
-% %: (def) `Page(s)'
-% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated
-% ppx,%: `Page' omitted
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':
-% %: (def) `Editor(s)'
-% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated
-%--------------------
-%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:
-% %: (def) No abbreviations
-% abr,%: Abbreviations
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words)
-% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn'
-% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed'
-%--------------------
-%MONTHS WITH DOTS:
-% %: (def) Months with dots
-% mth-bare,%: Months without dots
-%--------------------
-%EDITION NUMBERS:
-% xedn,%: Editions as in database
-% %: (def) Write out editions
-% ord,%: Numerical editions
-%--------------------
-%Reading external language file \cfile=cjs-rcs-french.mbs
- french,%: French language
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':
-% %: (def) `Page(s)'
- pp,%: `Page' abbreviated
-% ppx,%: `Page' omitted
-%--------------------
-%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITEUR:
-% %: (def) `\'Editeur(s)'
- ed,%: `\'Editeur' abbreviated
-%--------------------
-%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:
-% %: (def) No abbreviations
- abr,%: Abbreviations
-%--------------------
-%EDITION NUMBERS:
-% xedn,%: Editions as in database
-% %: (def) Write out editions
- ord,%: Numerical editions
-%--------------------
-%STORED JOURNAL NAMES:
- %: (def) Full journal names
-% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names
-% jabr,jaa,%: Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands
-%--------------------
-%AMPERSAND:
- %: (def) Use word `and'
-% amper,%: Use ampersand
-% varand,%: Use \BIBand
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `AND':
-% %: (def) Comma before `and'
- and-xcom,%: No comma before `and'
-% and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors)
-% and-com-ed,%: Comma with 2 editors
-% %: (def) Two editors without comma
-%--------------------
-%NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:
- %: (def) With `and'
-% xand,%: No `and'
-%--------------------
-%COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':
-% %: (def) Comma before `et al'
- etal-xc,%: No comma before `et al'
-%--------------------
-%FONT OF `ET AL':
- %: (def) Plain et al
-% etal-it,%: Italic et al
-% etal-rm,%: Roman et al
-%--------------------
-%ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:
- %: (def) No additional fields
-% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,%: Include REVTeX data fields
-%--------------------
-%E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields)
- %: (def) Do not include eprint field
-% eprint,%: Include eprint and archive fields
-%--------------------
-%URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields)
-% %: (def) No URL
- url,url-blk,%: Include URL
-% url,url-nt,%: URL as note
-% url,url-nl,%: URL on new line
-%--------------------
-%REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:
- %: (def) No reference component tags
-% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags
-%--------------------
-%EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics)
- %: (def) Use emphasis
-% em-it,%: Use true italics
-% em-x,%: No italics
-% em-ul,%: Underlining
-%--------------------
-%COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:
- nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands
-% plntx,%: Use only Plain TeX
-%--------------------
-,{%
- }}
-\generate{\file{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}{\MBopts}}
-\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj
deleted file mode 100644
index c987b1e6a7d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-\input docstrip.tex
-\keepsilent
-\askforoverwritefalse
-\nopostamble
-\preamble
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-canadienne de statistique
-
-This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-of this license is in:
-
- https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2006/05/20 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-
-This work consists of the file cjs-rcs-article.dtx and the derived
-files cjs-rcs-article.cls, cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex, cjs-template.tex
-and rcs-gabarit.tex.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\generate{
- \file{cjs-rcs-article.cls}{\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{class}}
- \file{cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{fr-doc}}
- \file{cjs-template.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{template,en}}
- \file{rcs-gabarit.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{template,fr}}
-}
-\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs
deleted file mode 100644
index e786d500bde..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,420 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*-
-%
-% English language definition file of the master bibliography style
-% for The Canadian Journal of Statistics | La revue canadienne de
-% statistique
-%
-% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-% canadienne de statistique
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-% of this license is in:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-%
-% This work derives from english.mbs, part of the custom-bib
-% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
-% Copyright 1994-2002 Patrick W Daly
-% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
-% Max-Planck-Str. 2
-% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
-% Germany
-% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
-%
- %-------------------------------------------------------------------
- % Begin module:
-%\fi
- % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD)]
-%\iffalse
-%<*a&!a>
-% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
-% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
-\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
- \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
-%</a&!a>
-%<*driver>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
-\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article}
-
- %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We
- %% need to:
- %%
- %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command;
- %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir;
- %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that
- %% doc.sty relies upon.
- \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition
- \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \makeatletter
- \def\makeglossary{%
- \newwrite\@glossaryfile
- \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \@wrglossary}\typeout
- {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }%
- \let\makeglossary\@empty
- }
- \@onlypreamble\makeglossary
- \def\@wrglossary#1{%
- \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}%
- {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
- \endgroup
- \@esphack}
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
- \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option
- \makeatother
- \usepackage{doc}
- \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified
- \DisableCrossrefs
- \CodelineNumbered
- \RecordChanges
- \OnlyDescription
- \DontCheckModules
-
- \AtEndPreamble{%
- \hypersetup{%
- pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada},
- pdftitle = {French language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs}}}
-
- %% Configuration of the glossary
- \addto\extrasenglish{%
- \def\glossaryname{Version history}}
- \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}}
- \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm}
-
- %% Additional semantic typesetting
- \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}}
- \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}}
-
- %% Name of the journal
- \makeatletter
- \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}}
- \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}}
- \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}}
- \makeatother
-
- %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using
- %% compilation time
- \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}}
-
- \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% end of meta-comment \fi
-% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}
-% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax
-%
-% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.2 of
-% \texttt{english.mbs} from \textbf{custom-bib}.}
-% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like
-% the main file.}
-% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through
-% CTAN.}
-%
-% \title[English language definition file \filename]{%
-% English language definition file \\
-% of the master bibliographic style file \\
-% for \TheCJS}
-% \author{Statistical Society of Canada}
-% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval}
-%
-% \begin{englishabstract}
-% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the
-% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and
-% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using
-% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{englishabstract}
-% \begin{frenchabstract}
-% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les
-% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français
-% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés
-% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{frenchabstract}
-%
-% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is
-% ^^A added by the environment.
-% \begin{classification}[Version]
-% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename}
-% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate}
-% \end{classification}
-%
-% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société
-% canadienne de statistique}
-%
-% \makeCJStitle
-%
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% This file is to be used as a language definition file with the
-% master bibliographic file for {\TheCJS}. The language it defines is
-% English.
-%
-% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
-% be used together with one that contains language support via
-% external definition files.
-%
-% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
-%
-% \section{The Menu Information}
-%
-% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
-% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
-% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
-% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
-% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*options>
-\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}
-\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}
-
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
-\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
-\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
- (if abbreviating words)}
- {\if\ans a*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
-\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
-\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
-\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
-\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptions
-%</options>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
-%
-% \section{The Coding}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!options&!driver>
-
- % The language selected here is ENGLISH
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}
-{ "and"}
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
-{ "et~al." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
-%<!ed>{ "editors" }
-%<ed>{ "eds." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
-%<!ed>{ "editor" }
-%<ed>{ "ed." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
-{ "edited by" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
-%<!abr>{ "edition" }
-%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
-%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
-%<!abr>{ "volume" }
-%<abr>{ "vol." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}
-{ "of" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}
-%<!abr>{ "number" }
-%<abr>{ "no." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
-{ "no." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}
-{ "in" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
-%<pp>{ "pp." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
-%<pp>{ "p." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-%<*revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
-{ "pages" }
-
-%</revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
-%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
-%<abr>{ "chap." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
-%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
-%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
-{ "Master's thesis" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
-{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
-
-%<*!xedn>
-FUNCTION {bbl.first}
-%<!ord>{ "First" }
-%<ord>{ "1st" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.second}
-%<!ord>{ "Second" }
-%<ord>{ "2nd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.third}
-%<!ord>{ "Third" }
-%<ord>{ "3rd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
-%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
-%<ord>{ "4th" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
-%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
-%<ord>{ "5th" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}
-{ "st" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
-{ "nd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
-{ "rd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}
-{ "th" }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
-% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
-% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
-% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
-% languages.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {eng.ord}
-{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
- #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
- { bbl.th * }
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
- duplicate$ "1" =
- { pop$ bbl.st * }
- { duplicate$ "2" =
- { pop$ bbl.nd * }
- { "3" =
- { bbl.rd * }
- { bbl.th * }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</!xedn>
-%<*!abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"January"}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"February"}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"March"}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"April"}
-
-MACRO {may} {"May"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"June"}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"July"}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"August"}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"September"}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"October"}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"November"}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"December"}
-
-%</!abr>
-%<*abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
-
-MACRO {may} {"May"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
-
-%</abr>
-%</!options&!driver>
- % End module: cjs-rcs-english.mbs
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs
deleted file mode 100644
index eb60ab8a202..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*-
-%
-% French language definition file of the master bibliography style for
-% The Canadian Journal of Statistics | La revue canadienne de
-% statistique
-%
-% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-% canadienne de statistique
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-% of this license is in:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-%
-% This work derives from french.mbs, part of the custom-bib
-% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
-% Copyright 1994-2002 Patrick W Daly
-% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
-% Max-Planck-Str. 2
-% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
-% Germany
-% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
-%
- %-------------------------------------------------------------------
- % Begin module:
-%\fi
- % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD)]
-%\iffalse
-%<*a&!a>
-% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
-% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
-\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
- \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
-%</a&!a>
-%<*driver>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
-\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article}
-
- %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We
- %% need to:
- %%
- %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command;
- %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir;
- %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that
- %% doc.sty relies upon.
- \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition
- \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \makeatletter
- \def\makeglossary{%
- \newwrite\@glossaryfile
- \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \@wrglossary}\typeout
- {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }%
- \let\makeglossary\@empty
- }
- \@onlypreamble\makeglossary
- \def\@wrglossary#1{%
- \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}%
- {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
- \endgroup
- \@esphack}
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
- \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option
- \makeatother
- \usepackage{doc}
- \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified
- \DisableCrossrefs
- \CodelineNumbered
- \RecordChanges
- \OnlyDescription
- \DontCheckModules
-
- \AtEndPreamble{%
- \hypersetup{%
- pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada},
- pdftitle = {French language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs}}}
-
- %% Configuration of the glossary
- \addto\extrasenglish{%
- \def\glossaryname{Version history}}
- \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}}
- \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm}
-
- %% Additional semantic typesetting
- \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}}
- \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}}
-
- %% Name of the journal
- \makeatletter
- \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}}
- \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}}
- \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}}
- \makeatother
-
- %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using
- %% compilation time
- \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}}
-
- \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% end of meta-comment \fi
-% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}
-% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax
-%
-% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.2 of
-% \texttt{french.mbs} from \textbf{custom-bib}.}
-% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like
-% the main file.}
-% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through
-% CTAN.}
-%
-% \title[French language definition file \filename]{%
-% French language definition file \\
-% of the master bibliographic style file \\
-% for \TheCJS}
-% \author{Statistical Society of Canada}
-% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval}
-%
-% \begin{englishabstract}
-% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the
-% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and
-% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using
-% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{englishabstract}
-% \begin{frenchabstract}
-% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les
-% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français
-% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés
-% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{frenchabstract}
-%
-% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is
-% ^^A added by the environment.
-% \begin{classification}[Version]
-% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename}
-% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate}
-% \end{classification}
-%
-% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société
-% canadienne de statistique}
-%
-% \makeCJStitle
-%
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% This file is to be used as a language definition file with the
-% master bibliographic file for {\TheCJS}. The language it defines is
-% French.
-%
-% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
-% be used together with one that contains language support via
-% external definition files.
-%
-% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
-%
-% \section{The Menu Information}
-%
-% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
-% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
-% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
-% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
-% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*options>
-\mes{^^JOptions for FRENCH}
-\wr{\spsp\spsp french,\pc: French language}
-
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
-\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITEUR:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`\string\'Editeur(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{ed}{`\string\'Editeur' abbreviated}{as \string\'Ed.}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Tome, \string\'edition, chapitre}
-\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
-\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as premi\string\`ere, deuxi\string\`eme,...}
-\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1re, 2e, 3e, etc}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptions
-%</options>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
-%
-% \section{The Coding}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!options&!driver>
-
- % The language selected here is FRENCH
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}
-{ "et"}
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
-{ "et~collab." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
-%<!ed>{ "directeurs" }
-%<ed>{ "dir." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
-%<!ed>{ "directeur" }
-%<ed>{ "dir." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
-{ "sous la direction de" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
-%<!abr>{ "\'edition" }
-%<abr>{ "\'ed." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
-%<!abr>{ "volume" }
-%<abr>{ "vol." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}
-{ "de" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}
-%<!abr>{ "num\'ero" }
-%<abr>{ "{\no}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
-{ "{\no}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}
-{ "dans" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
-%<pp>{ "p." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
-%<pp>{ "p." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-%<*revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
-{ "pages" }
-
-%</revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
-%<!abr>{ "chapitre" }
-%<abr>{ "chap." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
-%<!abr>{ "rapport technique" }
-%<abr>{ "rapport technique" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
-{ "m\'emoire de ma\^itrise" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
-{ "th\`ese de doctorat" }
-
-%<*!xedn>
-FUNCTION {bbl.first}
-%<!ord>{ "Premi\`ere" }
-%<ord>{ "1{\iere}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.second}
-%<!ord>{ "Deuxi\`eme" }
-%<ord>{ "2{\ieme}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.third}
-%<!ord>{ "Troisi\`eme" }
-%<ord>{ "3{\ieme}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
-%<!ord>{ "Quatri\`eme" }
-%<ord>{ "4{\ieme}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
-%<!ord>{ "Cinqui\`eme" }
-%<ord>{ "5{\ieme}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}
-{ "{\ieme}" }
-
-%</!xedn>
-%<*!abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"janvier"}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"f\'evrier"}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"mars"}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"avril"}
-
-MACRO {may} {"mai"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"juin"}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"juillet"}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"septembre"}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"octobre"}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"novembre"}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"d\'ecembre"}
-
-%</!abr>
-%<*abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"jan."}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"f\'ev."}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"mars"}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"avr."}
-
-MACRO {may} {"mai"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"juin"}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"juil."}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"sept."}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"oct."}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"d\'ec."}
-
-%</abr>
-%</!options&!driver>
- % End module: cjs-rcs-french.mbs
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs
deleted file mode 100644
index 10c84b1ff69..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8009 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*-
-%
-% Master bibliography style for The Canadian Journal of Statistics |
-% La revue canadienne de statistique
-%
-% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société
-% canadienne de statistique
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-% of this license is in:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet
-% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>.
-%
-% This work derives from merlin.mbs, part of the custom-bib
-% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
-% Copyright 1994-2011 Patrick W Daly
-% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
-% Max-Planck-Str. 2
-% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
-% Germany
-% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
-%
-%<*!tail>
-% (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file)
- % -------------------------------------------------------------------
- % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
-%\fi
- % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD, AO, DPC)]
-%\iffalse
-%</!tail>
-%<*a&!a>
-% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
-% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
-\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
- \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
-%</a&!a>
-%<*driver>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
-\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article}
- \usepackage{metalogo}
- \setlrmarginsandblock{40mm}{30mm}{*} % increase left margin
- \checkandfixthelayout
-
- %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We
- %% need to:
- %%
- %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command;
- %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir;
- %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that
- %% doc.sty relies upon.
- \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition
- \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
- \makeatletter
- \def\makeglossary{%
- \newwrite\@glossaryfile
- \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \@wrglossary}\typeout
- {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }%
- \let\makeglossary\@empty
- }
- \@onlypreamble\makeglossary
- \def\@wrglossary#1{%
- \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}%
- {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
- \endgroup
- \@esphack}
- \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
- \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option
- \makeatother
- \usepackage{doc}
- \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified
- \DisableCrossrefs
- \CodelineNumbered
- \RecordChanges
- \OnlyDescription
- \DontCheckModules
-
- \AtEndPreamble{%
- \hypersetup{%
- pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada},
- pdftitle = {Master bibliographic style cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}}}
-
- %% Configuration of the glossary
- \addto\extrasenglish{%
- \def\glossaryname{Version history}}
- \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}}
- \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm}
-
- %% Additional semantic typesetting
- \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}}
- \newcommand*\btx{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
- \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}}
-
- %% Name of the journal
- \makeatletter
- \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}}
- \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}}
- \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}}
- \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}}
- \makeatother
-
- %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using
- %% compilation time
- \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}}
-
- \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% end of meta-comment \fi
-% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}
-% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax
-%
-% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.33 of
-% \texttt{merlin.mbs}.}
-% \changes{0.92}{2023-10-27}{Relegate the \texttt{makebst} menu
-% information to the complete documentation.}
-% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like
-% the main file.}
-% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through
-% CTAN.}
-%
-% \title[Master bibliographic style file \filename]{%
-% Master bibliographic style file \\
-% of \TheCJS}
-% \author{Statistical Society of Canada}
-% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval}
-%
-% \begin{englishabstract}
-% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the
-% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and
-% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using
-% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{englishabstract}
-% \begin{frenchabstract}
-% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les
-% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français
-% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés
-% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation
-% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}.
-% \end{frenchabstract}
-%
-% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is
-% ^^A added by the environment.
-% \begin{classification}[Version]
-% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename}
-% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate}
-% \end{classification}
-%
-% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société
-% canadienne de statistique}
-%
-% \makeCJStitle
-%
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% The class {\CJSclass} typesets manuscripts immediately in accordance
-% with the presentation rules of {\TheCJS}. The class uses its own
-% bibliographic styles: {\CJSbsten} for articles in English, and
-% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. The style {\CJSbsten} could best
-% be described as ``not unlike \code{apalike}'', whereas {\CJSbstfr}
-% is closely derived from the style \code{francais} provided by the
-% package %
-% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/francais-bst}{\pkg{francais-bst}}.
-%
-% The styles were originally generated using the program
-% \code{makebst} by Patrick W.~Daly. The master bibliographic style
-% and the language definition files are heavily based on their
-% counterparts of the package %
-% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/custom-bib}{\pkg{custom-bib}}, %
-% namely \code{merlin.mbs}, \code{english.mbs}, and \code{french.mbs}.
-%
-% \section{Generation of the bibliographic styles}
-% \label{sec:generation}
-%
-% The English style {\CJSbsten} is produced from this master
-% bibliographic style file and the language definition file
-% \code{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} by running the driver
-% \code{cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj} through {\LaTeX}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \code{latex cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj}
-% \end{quote}
-% The French style {\CJSbstfr} is produced similarly using the driver
-% \code{cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \code{latex cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj}
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \section{Changes compared to \texorpdfstring{\code{merlin.mbs}}{merlin.mbs}}
-% \label{sec:changes}
-%
-% The master bibliographic style \code{\filename} introduces the following
-% changes compared to \code{merlin.mbs}.
-%
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item The function \code{format.url} is reworked to provide a
-% cleaner URL for digital object identifiers (DOIs). The
-% \code{merlin.mbs} definition would generate a DOI of the form
-% \begin{quote}
-% URL \texttt{http://dx.doi.org/\meta{doi}}
-% \end{quote}
-% The revised definition instead generates the simpler string
-% \begin{quote}
-% doi: \meta{doi}
-% \end{quote}
-% When the package \pkg{hyperref} is loaded, \meta{doi} is a
-% hyperlink to the now recommended URL
-% \code{https://doi.org/\meta{doi}}. This behaviour relies on a
-% command \cmd{\urldoi} provided in the \texttt{.bbl} file. If
-% needed, this command may be redefined by the user.
-% \item The command \cmd{\urlprefix} is empty. Again, this may be
-% redefined by the user.
-% \item The quotes «~» are typeset by the macro \cmd{\frquote} of
-% \pkg{babel-french} (version $\geq$ 3.1), rather than by the custom
-% commands \cmd{\guillemotleft} and \cmd{\guillemotright}.
-% \item The \code{makebst} menu information is only included in the
-% complete documentation. The latter is obtained by commenting out
-% the command \cmd{\OnlyDescription} in \code{\filename} and
-% compiling the file with {pdf\LaTeX} or {\XeLaTeX}.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
-%
-% \begin{quote}
-% \itshape From this point on, the documentation is taken without
-% modification from \code{merlin.mbs} by Patrick W.~Daly, but for
-% minute details such as filenames.
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu}
-%
-% Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular
-% master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file
-% to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex}
-% with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give
-% \begin{quote}\code{\filename}\end{quote}
-% when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions
-% in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here.
-%
-% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
-% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
-% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between
-% \begin{quote}
-% |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ |</!options&!driver&!bblbst>|
-% \end{quote}
-% in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
-% extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the
-% \texttt{babelbst.tex} file.
-%
-% The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and
-% \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name
-% support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option
-% |<!tail>| and the tail with |<!head>|. This roundabout means of
-% doing things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with
-% \texttt{.dbj} files that were generated for the older
-% \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by simply changing the name of the source
-% file. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and \texttt{exlang})
-% options are omitted, as they are in the older \texttt{.dbj} files,
-% \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one pass. To include
-% external files, two passes are needed, one for each part, with the
-% external file(s) coming in between.
-%
-% Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if
-% \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is
-% English, which is tested for as |<!babel>|. This too permits the simple
-% update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English.
-%
-% \subsection*{Selecting Language}
-% Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and},
-% \textsl{editor}, etc.,
-% are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on.
-% By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but
-% other languages are also possible.
-%
-% The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in
-% external files. At this point, we can make use of features in
-% \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a
-% definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is
-% specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are
-% two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel).
-%
-% The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are
-% defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}.
-%
-% If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst}
-% cannot support external files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*options>
-\expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax
- \mes{^^J******************^^J%
- !!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J%
- This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J%
- You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J%
- No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J%
- ******************}
- \let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp
-
-\newif\ifnumerical
-\newif\ifmytemp
-\mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J%
- <<< the various options, see the section on ^^J%
- <<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.}
-
-\umes{EXTERNAL FILES:}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax
- \mes{^^J**************^^J%
- Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J%
- Cannot add external file for language definition^^J%
- **************}
- \umes{No included files.}%
- \def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}%
-\else
- \MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile
- \edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext}
- \ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi
- \umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names
-% of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file.
-% Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by
-% commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later
-% parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension.
-%
-% Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e.,
-% it does not check if the file(s) actually exist.
-%
-% The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the
-% list of file names.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\jfile{}
- \ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)}
- \mytempfalse
- \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi
- \ifmytemp
- \MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile
- \edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext}
- \umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}%
- \else
- \umes{No included files.}%
- \fi
-\fi%MBswitch
-\def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are
-% empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and
-% \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through
-% \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made.
-%
-% If there is an external definition file, or an external list of
-% journal names, then some extra text must be
-% written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is
-% explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly
-% braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on
-% their grouping functionality. This permits unbalanced braces to be
-% written to the output file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
- \begingroup\MBswitch
- \wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta})
- \if!\cfile!\else
- \wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta})
- \fi
- \if!\jfile!\else
- \let\jxfile\jfile
- \loop
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile??
- \wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta})
- \edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext)
- \if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi
- \if!\Mtst!
- \repeat
- \fi
- \wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}})
- \wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc)
- \endgroup
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Ask whether there is a need for
-% explicit English words or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are
-% to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT
- (if no external language file)}%
- {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly}
-\optdef{b}{babel}{Babel}
- {(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\if!\cfile!\relax\else
-\wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Author--year or numerical}
-% The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation
-% style is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my
-% \code{natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional
-% argument containing the short form of the authors, plus year in
-% parentheses. E.g.,
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that
-% supports an optional full author list too, as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of
-% bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the
-% form
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\
-% | and Williams}{1990}{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\
-% | Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty})
-% with entries of the form
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-% Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use
-% with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a
-% \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite
-% key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key
-% visible.
-%
-% A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu
-% features depend on which system is to be used.
-%
-% The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options
-% \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three
-% letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of
-% first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first
-% three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and
-% full name of first author.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX}
-\optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface}
-\optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors}
-\optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors}
-\optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)}
-\optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi
-\if\ans b\mytempfalse \else\mytemptrue \fi
-\beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT
- (if non author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical*\fi}
-\optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output}
-\optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs}
-\optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers}
-\optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}
-\optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later}
-\optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations}
-\optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty}
-\optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty}
-\optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty}
-\optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty}
-\optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty}
-\optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty}
-\getans
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new
-% \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years
-% to be variable with commands. These features may be added too.
-% The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists
-% independently of it too.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED
- (if Harvard support selected)}
- {\if\ans h*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty}
-\optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Language switching}
-% A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of
-% the reference; with \verb!\setlanguage!, the hyphenation patterns are set for
-% setting the title in that language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No language field}{}
-\optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Annotations}
-% Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed
-% out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases.
-% The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized}
-\optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Presentations}
-% Presentations are talks at meetings, oral or poster, that are not otherwise
-% published. The author making the presentation is indicated with the \texttt{key}
-% entry, which is the speaker's number within the author list. The font used
-% to highlight the speaker is either bold or italics, depending on the secondary
-% option, otherwise not highlighted.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{PRESENTATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Do not add presentation type}{for conference talks}
-\optdef{p}{pres}{Add presentation, speaker not highlighted}{}
-\optdef{b}{pres,pres-bf}{Presentation, speaker bold face}{}
-\optdef{i}{pres,pres-it}{Presentaion, speaker italic}{}
-\optdef{c}{pres,pres-sc}{Presentaion, speaker in small caps}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references}
-% Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is
-% alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also
-% choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original
-% citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is
-% also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can
-% also be used for numerical listings.
-%
-% Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only
-% makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year
-% in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical
-% listings.
-%
-% For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is
-% offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}).
-%
-% For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the
-% optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the
-% |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first
-% author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by
-% the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a
-% more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some
-% journals (like JGR).
-%
-% One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the
-% same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the
-% title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the
-% letters a, b,
-% c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with
-% a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is
-% to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course
-% assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ans\relax
-\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
- (if non-author/year and non-alph)}
- {\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
-\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)}
-\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors}
-\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-%
-\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
-\optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}%
- {(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)}
-\optdef{m}{seq-labc}{By label and cite order}%
- {(like above but all Jones et al ordered as cited)}
-\optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above}
-\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)}
-\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)}
-\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a
-% fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these
-% honorifics.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART
- (if not citation order)}
- {\if\ans c\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)}
-\optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Sorting normally treats authors with the same surname but different initials
-% or first name separately; but a strict ordering by cite label would lump all
-% Smiths together.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Respect first names}{or initials, treat as different authors}
-\optdef{x}{xintls}{Sort on surname only}{and treat all Smiths as one}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Formatting author names}
-% The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names
-% first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in
-% the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other
-% possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib}
-% file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of
-% the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with
-% reversed initials.
-%
-% If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor
-% names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots''
-% or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are
-% not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are.
-% An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)}
-\optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)}
-\optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)}
-\optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)}
-\optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)}
-\optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)}
-\optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)}
-\optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)}
-\optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)}
-\optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}%
- {(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)}
-\optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}%
- {(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS
- (if author names reversed)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}
-\if\ans r
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans s
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans a
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans x
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans f
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans y
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith}
-\fi
-\if\ans b
-\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
-\fi
-\optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR
- (if author names reversed)}
- {}
-\optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.}
-\optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing}
-\optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{}
-\optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{}
-\optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{}
-\optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{}
-\optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{}
-\optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Number of authors}
-% Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is
-% presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit
-% them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author
-% names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed.
-%
-% Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the
-% \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex),
-% this is done here.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing}
-\optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\if\ans l
-\loop
- \ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)}
- \ifnum\num>99\relax
- \mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99}
-\repeat
-\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors}
- \else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
-\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
-\mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors}
-\edef\numx{\num}
-\loop
- \ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)}
- \ifnum\num>\numx
- \mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx}
-\repeat
-\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors}
- \else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
-\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
-\mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors}
-\fi
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Something that I finally added after being asked many times, is to allow for
-% more than one name in the citation before inserting \textsl{et~al.}
-% to allow more than 2 authors before truncating
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{One author et al}{for three or more authors}
-\optdef{m}{mcite}{Some other truncation scheme}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans m\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL:
- (if regular cite not selected)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{mct-1}{One et al}{}
-\optdef{2}{mct-2}{One, Two et al}{}
-\optdef{3}{mct-3}{One, Two, Three et al}{}
-\optdef{4}{mct-4}{One, Two, Three, Four et al}{}
-\optdef{5}{mct-5}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al}{}
-\optdef{6}{mct-6}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL:
- (if regular cite not selected)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{mct-x2}{Two authors without truncating}{}
-\optdef{3}{mct-x3}{Three authors}{without truncating}
-\optdef{4}{mct-x4}{Four authors}{without truncating}
-\optdef{5}{mct-x5}{Five authors}{without truncating}
-\optdef{6}{mct-x6}{Six authors}{without truncating}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Typeface of names}
-% The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current
-% typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics.
-%
-% Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the
-% regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be
-% in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic.
-%
-% Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|,
-% which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does
-% not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first
-% names, to be user-defined.
-%
-% Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these
-% fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{}
-\optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)}
-\optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)}
-\optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)}
-\optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES
- (if non-default font for authors)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{}
-\optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{}
-\optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{}
-\optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)}
-\optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Names in Citation label}
-% This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written
-% by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like
-% `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the
-% extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain.
-%
-% This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references
-% except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames
-% are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also
-% be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there
-% will be no default definition for it.
-%
-% If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be
-% optionally put in the normal font.
-%
-% It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since
-% this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the
-% author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a
-% number of private style files for achieving this.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command}
-\optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{}
-\optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{}
-\optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{}
-\optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)}
-\getans
-
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS
- (if non-default font for citation lables)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{}
-\optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL
- (The extra letter on the year)}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{}
-\optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Label for missing author names}
-%
-% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
-% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
-% entries.
-%
-% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
-% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
-% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
-% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if
-% \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces
-% (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like
-% |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would
-% get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on
-% a blank year.)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)}
-\optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Missing date}
-% A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case,
-% \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year
-% punctuation or brackets.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text}
-\optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Position of date}
-% This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date
-% immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year)
-% are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the
-% end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place
-% it even after the notes.
-%
-% Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal
-% specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at
-% the end.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{}
-\optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{}
-\optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end}
-\optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Format of date}
-% The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a
-% colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears.
-% For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month,
-% but this may be overridden.
-%
-% If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special
-% punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is
-% probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses.
-%
-% The date can even be put into bold face.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
- (if non author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets}
-\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)}
-\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]}
-\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'}
-\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'}
-\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'}
-\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{}
-\optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
- (if including month)}
- {\if\ans x\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
-\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets}
-\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)}
-\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]}
-\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'}
-\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'}
-\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'}
-\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month}
-\optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
- (if including month)}
- {\if\ans m*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
-\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION
- (if date not at end)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)}
-\optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:}
-\optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;}
-\optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas}
-\optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation}
-\optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{}
-\optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated
-% to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some
-% users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so
-% that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.''
-% Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually,
-% I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR
- (if author-year citations)}
- {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'}
-\optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Article title in journal}
-% The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or
-% conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single
-% or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a
-% poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases.
-%
-% Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first
-% word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file
-% entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it
-% should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always
-% capitalized in braces. Example:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"|
-% \end{quote}
-% which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The
-% Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option.
-%
-% Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font}
-\optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)}
-\optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)}
-\optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)}
-\optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<<Title,>> ..)}
-\optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)}
-\optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)}
-\optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<<Title>>, ..)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES
- (if quoted title)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too}
-\optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)}
-\optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings}
-\optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Journal names}
-% Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be
-% removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are
-% retained.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'}
-\optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{}
-\optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports}
-% The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same
-% as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of
-% an article.
-%
-% The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that
-% of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{}
-\optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{}
-\optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{}
-\optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'}
-\optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}%
- {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Journal reference}
-% Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be
-% formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits.
-% The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume
-% start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound
-% together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages
-% continuously through the whole volume.
-%
-% I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each
-% `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation.
-% I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I
-% now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must
-% contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at
-% version 3.84.
-%
-% A number of styles for journal specifications are
-% \begin{quote}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
-% 21(2):33--55 & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\
-% \textbf{21}(2):33--55 & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\
-% \textit{21}(2), 33--55 & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\
-% 21(2) (1995) 33--55 & 21(1995), 33-55\\
-% 21(2) 33--55 & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the
-% start page is wanted.
-%
-% It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification,
-% in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space
-% to the volume, or preceding the pages.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)}
-\optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)}
-\optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)}
-\optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.',
-% with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used
-% with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)}
-\optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)}
-\optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2}
-\optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2}
-\optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2}
-\optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2}
-\optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp}
-\optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp}
-\optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp}
-\optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp}
-\optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position}
-\optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)}
-\optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)}
-\optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387}
-\optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given}
-\optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{}
-\optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234}
-\optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234}
-\optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256}
-\optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as
-% well as for journals.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal}
-\optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21}
-\optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and
-% inproceedings.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"}
-\optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX}
-\optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX}
-\optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{}
-\optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be
-% separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name}
-\optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Books}
-% The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is
-% normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font.
-%
-% The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)}
-\optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55}
-\optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)}
-\optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{}
-\optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.}
-\optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding
-% the name, separated by colon, as
-% \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote}
-%
-% Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date,
-% as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in
-% parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of
-% parentheses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York}
-\optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses}
-\optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{}
-\optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)}
-\optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)}
-\optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994}
-\optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{}
-\optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{}
-\optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers}
-% Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an
-% optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet},
-% \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}.
-% However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when
-% there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number.
-%
-% Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or
-% course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since
-% they are sometimes printed in a periodical.
-%
-% Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more
-% robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded.
-% The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the
-% page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number
-% where the pages would normally appear.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{}
-\optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.}
-\optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{}
-\optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals}
-\optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{}
-\optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"}
-\optdef{u}{url-doi}{Format DOI as URL //doi.org/doi}{(must give url options!)}
-\optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number}
-\optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Editor of book without author}
-%
-% This is normally
-% \begin{quote}
-% J. K. James, editor
-% \end{quote}
-% but may also be
-% \begin{quote}
-% J. K. James, (editor)\\
-% J. K. James (editor),
-% \end{quote}
-% Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or
-% abbreviated.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{}
-\optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after}
-\optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case}
-\optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between}
-\optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
-\optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas}
-\optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Edited by}
-% For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is
-% \begin{quote}
-% In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots
-% \end{quote}
-% Alternative forms are
-% \begin{quote}
-% In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\
-% In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\
-% In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots
-% \end{quote}
-% If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is
-% used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)}
-\optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)}
-\optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{}
-\optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{}
-\optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{}
-\optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{}
-\optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{}
-\optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{}
-\optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{}
-\optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY'
- (if editor capitalizable)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case}
-\optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Block punctuation}
-% Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the
-% author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally
-% separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another
-% choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given.
-%
-% \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks
-% are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only
-% function when the default option here is taken, for then the command
-% |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally
-% defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line
-% when open bibliographies are wanted.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks}
- {(periods or new lines with openbib option)}
-\optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{}
-\optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{}
-\optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{}
-\optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
-\optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
-\optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas}
-\optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\mytempfalse
-\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi
-\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES
- (if not using \string\newblock)}
- {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks}
-\optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation}
-\optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon}
-% When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing
-% that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings}
-\optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')}
-\optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space}
-\optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{}
-\optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES
- (if using 'in' with collections)}
- {\if\ans x\else*\fi}
-\optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{}
-\optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Final punctuation}
-% The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This
-% may be suppressed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference}
-\optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Abbreviations}
-% A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter,
-% and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the
-% rest with a single option.
-%
-% Additionally, the edition numbers may be
-% output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.).
-% (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English
-% words.)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'
- (if not using external language file)}
- {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
-\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
-\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
-\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
- (if abbreviating words)}
- {\if\ans a*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
-\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
-\getans
-\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
-\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
-\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
-\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal
-% languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language
-% definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made
-% in the external file, which is read in at this point.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}%
-\if!\cfile!\relax\else
- \input\cfile
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in
-% the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal
-% names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr}
-% or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option
-% menus from the journal-name files will be read in.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals}
-\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{}
-\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}}
-% It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to
-% specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two
-% names.
-%
-% A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand|
-% in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the
-% document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations
-% where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in
-% textual ones.)
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists}
-\optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'}
-\optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'}
-\optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'}
-\optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS
- (if using comma before `and' with authors)}
- {\if\ans c*\fi}%
-\optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections}
-\optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list}
-\optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-
-\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list}
-\optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}}
-% One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics.
-% Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the
-% \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{}
-\optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{}
-\optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex}
-% The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support
-% with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of
-% \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a
-% reference.
-% \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos
-% or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the
-% online article. The output is\\
-% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|
-% \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\
-% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\
-% The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is
-% translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition
-% of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec}
-% as a URL.
-% \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned
-% into a hyperlink.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two
-% appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected
-% independently of this option.
-%
-% In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that
-% no longer use page numbers.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier.
-% \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in
-% conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are
-% desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev.
-%
-% The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be
-% included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields.
-%
-% The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for
-% the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the
-% page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed
-% volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX}
-\optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields}
- {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url}
-\getans
-\mytemptrue
-\if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi
-\beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD:
-(without REVTeX fields)}
-{\ifmytemp*\fi}
-\optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{}
-\optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{URL address}
-% For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry.
-% Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles.
-% The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url}
-% package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command
-% to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise,
-% \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded
-% by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the
-% user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included.
-%
-% Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the
-% offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS:
-(without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi}
-\optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents}
-\optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block}
-\optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{}
-\optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging}
-% If reference component tagging is enabled, we
-% apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data
-% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that
-% these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography|
-% environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the
-% tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag
-% information to separate authors from title, for example.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags}
- {in the \string\bibitem\space entries}
-\optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags}
- {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Define emphasis}
-% In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be
-% understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the
-% command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always
-% italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and
-% |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or
-% to switch off italics altogether.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS:
- (affects all so-called italics)}{}
-\optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching}
-\optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics}
-\optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all}
-\optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
-% Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands,
-% which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with
-% Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands
-% that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax.
-%
-% If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX,
-% do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{}
-\optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX}
-\optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing}
-\getans
-\endoptiongroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called,
-% then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
-\begingroup\MBswitch
-\wr(,{\pc)
-\endgroup
-\fi
-
-\endoptions
-%</options>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The Bibliographic Coding}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>
-%<*!tail>
- % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
- % -------------------------------------------------------------------
-%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
- % WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
- % The input dbj file contains one of the options
-%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def
-%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def
- % without the corresponding general option(s):
-%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft
-%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab
- % (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs)
- % Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess.
- %
-%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
-%<*!exlang>
-%<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
-%<*babel>
- % This bibliography style file requires a file named babelbst.tex
- % containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc.
-%</babel>
-%</!exlang>
-%<*exlang>
- % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in
-%<bahasa> % BAHASA
-%<brazilian> % BRAZILIAN
-%<catalan> % CATALAN
-%<croatian> % CROATIAN
-%<czech> % CZECH
-%<danish> % DANISH
-%<dansk> % DANSK
-%<dutch> % DUTCH
-%<english> % ENGLISH
-%<esperanto> % ESPERANTO
-%<finnish> % FINNISH
-%<french> % FRENCH
-%<galacian> % GALACIAN
-%<german> % GERMAN
-%<hungarian> % HUNGARIAN
-%<italian> % ITALIAN
-%<norwegian> % NORWEGIAN
-%<norsk> % NORWEGIAN
-%<polski> % POLISH
-%<polish> % POLISH
-%<portuguese> % PORTUGUESE
-%<romanian> % ROMANIAN
-%<russian> % RUSSIAN
-%<slovak> % SLOVAK
-%<slovenian> % SLOVENIAN
-%<slovene> % SLOVENIAN
-%<spanish> % SPANISH
-%<swedish> % SWEDISH
-%<turkish> % TURKISH
-%</exlang>
-%<*!html>
-%<*ay>
- % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
- % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
- % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
-%<*alk>
- % or: apalike.sty by Oren Patashnik
- % The form of the \bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}...
-%</alk>
-%<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
- % The form of the \bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
-%<nat> % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
- % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
- % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
- % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
- % parenthesis!
-%<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
- % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
- % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
- % be parentheses in the label.
- % The \cite command functions as follows:
- % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
-%<nat> % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
- % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
-%<nat> % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
- % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
- % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
- % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990, p. 32)
- % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
-%<nat> % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
- % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
-%</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
-%<*har>
- % or: harvard.sty by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier
-%<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3 or harvard v2.0.3)
- % The form of the bibitem entries is
- % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}...
-%</har>
-%<*cay>
- % or: chicago.sty
- % The form of the bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith}
- % {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}...
-%</cay>
-%<*nmd>
- % or: named.sty
- % The form of the bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
-%</nmd>
-%<*ast>
- % or: astron.sty
- % The form of the bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
-%</ast>
-%<*cn>
- % or: authordate1-4.sty
- % The form of the bibitem entries is
- % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}...
-%</cn>
-%</ay>
-%<*!ay>
-%<*!alph&!cite>
- % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX.
-%</!alph&!cite>
-%<*alph>
- % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst,
- % where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89.
-%</alph>
-%<*cite&!alph>
- % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be
- % used to list all the entries in a bib database
-%</cite&!alph>
- % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text.
- % The form of the \bibitem entries is
-%<!alph&!cite> % \bibitem{key}...
-%<alph> % \bibitem[label]{key}...
-%<!alph&cite> % \bibitem[key]{key}...
-%<*!cite|alph>
- % Usage of \cite is as follows:
-%<*!alph&!cite>
- % \cite{key} ==>> [#]
- % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2]
- % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list.
-%</!alph&!cite>
-%<*alph>
- % \cite{key} ==>> [label]
- % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2]
- % The order in the reference list is by label.
-%</alph>
-%<*seq-no&!alph>
- % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally
- % cited in the text, or that in the database.
-%</seq-no&!alph>
-%<*!seq-no&!alph>
- % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors.
-%</!seq-no&!alph>
-%</!cite|alph>
-%</!ay>
-%</!html>
-%<*html>
- % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX.
- % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output
- % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged,
- % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need
- % to be revised.
- %
-%<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list.
-%<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed
-%<htdes> % before each entry.
-%<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph.
-%</html>
- % -------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'}
-% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or
-% rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it
-% here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}.
-%
-% Books normally have an ISBN number.
-% This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in
-% \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-ENTRY
- { address
-%<annote> annote
-%<eprint> archive
- author
- booktitle
- chapter
-%<revdata> collaboration
-%<doi|url-doi> doi
- edition
- editor
- eid
-%<eprint> eprint
- howpublished
- institution
-%<isbn> isbn
-%<issn> issn
- journal
- key
-%<lang> language
- month
- note
- number
-%<revdata> numpages
- organization
- pages
- publisher
- school
- series
- title
- type
-%<url|harnm|revdata> url
- volume
- year
- }
- {}
-%<!ay&!alph> { label }
-%<!ay&alph> { label extra.label sort.label }
-%<ay> { label extra.label sort.label short.list }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
-{ #0 'before.all :=
- #1 'mid.sentence :=
- #2 'after.sentence :=
- #3 'after.block :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist
-% past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate
-% between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-STRINGS { s t}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
-{ 's :=
- output.state mid.sentence =
-%<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)> { ", " * write$ }
-%<blk-com&com-semi> { "; " * write$ }
-%<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank> { " " * write$ }
- { output.state after.block =
- { add.period$ write$
- newline$
-%<!html> "\newblock " write$
- }
- { output.state before.all =
- 'write$
- { add.period$ " " * write$ }
- if$
- }
- if$
- mid.sentence 'output.state :=
- }
- if$
- s
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`output'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {output}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- 'pop$
- 'output.nonnull
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`output.check'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {output.check}
-{ 't :=
- duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
- 'output.nonnull
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'}
-% I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is
-% from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or
-% uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {fin.entry}
-%<*!fin-bare>
-{ add.period$
- write$
-%</!fin-bare>
-%<*fin-bare>
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- 'pop$
- 'write$
- if$
-%</fin-bare>
-%<html&htdes> "</dd>" write$
-%<html&!htdes&htlist> "</li>" write$
-%<html&!htdes&!htlist> "</p>" write$
- newline$
-%<*annote>
-%<*!html>
- annote missing$
- { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
- { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$
- }
- if$
-%</!html>
-%<*html>
- "<blockquote><strong>Key:</strong> "
- cite$ * write$
- annote missing$
- { newline$ }
- { "<br><strong>Annotation:</strong>" write$ newline$
- annote write$ newline$
- }
- if$
- "</blockquote>" write$ newline$
-%</html>
-%</annote>
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.block'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {new.block}
-{ output.state before.all =
- 'skip$
- { after.block 'output.state := }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {new.sentence}
-{ output.state after.block =
- 'skip$
- { output.state before.all =
- 'skip$
- { after.sentence 'output.state := }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`add.blank'}
-% When text is printed with \texttt{output} or
-% \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that
-% a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to
-% suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the
-% \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no
-% punctuation is to be inserted.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {add.blank}
-{ " " * before.all 'output.state :=
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`add.colon'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*au-col|tit-col>
-FUNCTION {add.colon}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- 'skip$
- { ":" * add.blank }
- if$
-}
-
-%</au-col|tit-col>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'}
-% Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace|
-% permits a line break at this point.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*yrpp-xsp>
-FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
-%<*!html>
-{ "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state :=
-}
-%</!html>
-%<html>{ before.all 'output.state := }
-
-%</yrpp-xsp>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`date.block'}
-% The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects
-% after the date.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {date.block}
-{
-%<*!yrp-x>
-%<yrp-col> ":" *
-%<*!yrp-col>
-%<yrp-semi> ";" *
-%<*!yrp-semi>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per> skip$
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per> new.sentence
-%</!yrp-semi>
-%</!yrp-col>
-%</!yrp-x>
-%<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
-%<!yrpp-xsp> add.blank
-%<yrpp-xsp> no.blank.or.punct
-%</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`not'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {not}
-{ { #0 }
- { #1 }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`and'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {and}
-{ 'skip$
- { pop$ #0 }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`or'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {or}
-{ { pop$ #1 }
- 'skip$
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`non.stop'}
-% This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string
-% on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to
-% be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
-FUNCTION {non.stop}
-{ duplicate$
- "}" * add.period$
- #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
-}
-
-%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'}
-% This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used
-% for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously
-% \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just
-% dots.
-%
-% May 2007, Joseph A. Wright (Morning Star, UK) contributed a revision to allow
-% the dot accent |\.| to be retained.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
-STRINGS {z}
-
-FUNCTION {remove.dots}
-{ 'z :=
- ""
- { z empty$ not }
- { z #1 #2 substring$
- duplicate$ "\." =
- { z #3 global.max$ substring$ 'z := * }
- { pop$
- z #1 #1 substring$
- z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
- duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
- { * }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- while$
-}
-%</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {new.block.checka}
-{ empty$
- 'skip$
- 'new.block
- if$
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
-{ empty$
- swap$ empty$
- and
- 'skip$
- 'new.block
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka}
-{ empty$
- 'skip$
- 'new.sentence
- if$
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb}
-{ empty$
- swap$ empty$
- and
- 'skip$
- 'new.sentence
- if$
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {field.or.null}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
- 'skip$
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`emphasize'}
-% Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command
-% may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {emphasize}
-%<*!em-x>
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<html> { "<i>" swap$ * "</i>" * }
-%<*!html>
-%<em-ul> { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<*!em-ul>
-%<*!nfss>
-%<!em-it> { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * }
-%<em-it> { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * }
-%</!nfss>
-%<*nfss>
-%<!em-it> { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<em-it> { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%</nfss>
-%</!em-ul>
-%</!html>
- if$
-}
-%</!em-x>
-%<em-x>{ skip$ }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bolden'}
-% The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
-FUNCTION {bolden}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<html> { "<b>" swap$ * "</b>" * }
-%<*!html>
-%<!nfss> { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * }
-%<nfss> { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%</!html>
- if$
-}
-%</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`scaps'}
-% To put text into small caps.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
-FUNCTION {scaps}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<html> { skip$ }
-%<*!html>
-%<!nfss> { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * }
-%<nfss> { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%</!html>
- if$
-}
-%</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'}
-% \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'}
-% \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'}
-% Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the
-% surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names
-% (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is
-% deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names.
-%
-% For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear.
-%
-% It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the
-% user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|,
-% and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands
-% are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given.
-%
-% If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names
-% are formatted the same as the surnames.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nmft>
-FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
-%<nmft-it>{ emphasize }
-%<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden }
-%<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps }
-%<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<!html> { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<html> { skip$ }
- if$
-}
-%</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
-FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
-%<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font }
-%<fnm-rm>{ skip$ }
-%<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<!html> { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<html> { skip$ }
- if$
-}
-%</!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
-%</nmft>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lab>
-FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
-%<lab-it>{ emphasize }
-%<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden }
-%<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps }
-%<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<!html> { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<html> { skip$ }
- if$
-}
-%</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
-%</lab>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'}
-% The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether
-% the top item on the stack requires a tie character and
-% slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it.
-% At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to
-% the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found
-% just ahead of it on the stack.
-%
-% The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom
-% for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space
-% depending on the length of the top object.
-%
-% Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch,
-% and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
- { "~" }
- { " " }
- if$
- swap$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`capitalize'}
-% Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel},
-% some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and
-% |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-
-FUNCTION {capitalize}
-%<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }
-%<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * }
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`space.word'}
-% The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or
-% words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$
-% functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit
-% text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to
-% define the word functions to be without spacing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {space.word}
-{ " " swap$ * " " * }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
- % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!exlang>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'}
-% These are the default English words. There is no default language
-% option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!babel>
- % The language selected here is ENGLISH
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}
-%<!varand|html>{ "and"}
-%<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"}
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
-{ "et~al." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
-%<!ed>{ "editors" }
-%<ed>{ "eds." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
-%<!ed>{ "editor" }
-%<ed>{ "ed." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
-{ "edited by" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
-%<!abr>{ "edition" }
-%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
-%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
-%<!abr>{ "volume" }
-%<abr>{ "vol." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}
-{ "of" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}
-%<!abr>{ "number" }
-%<abr>{ "no." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
-{ "no." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}
-{ "in" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
-%<pp>{ "pp." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
-%<pp>{ "p." }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-%<*revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
-{ "pages" }
-
-%</revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
-%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
-%<abr>{ "chap." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
-%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
-%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
-{ "Master's thesis" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
-{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
-
-%<*!xedn>
-FUNCTION {bbl.first}
-%<!ord>{ "First" }
-%<ord>{ "1st" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.second}
-%<!ord>{ "Second" }
-%<ord>{ "2nd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.third}
-%<!ord>{ "Third" }
-%<ord>{ "3rd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
-%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
-%<ord>{ "4th" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
-%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
-%<ord>{ "5th" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}
-{ "st" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
-{ "nd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
-{ "rd" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}
-{ "th" }
-
-%</!xedn>
-%<*!abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"January"}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"February"}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"March"}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"April"}
-
-MACRO {may} {"May"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"June"}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"July"}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"August"}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"September"}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"October"}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"November"}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"December"}
-
-%</!abr>
-%<*abr>
-MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
-
-MACRO {may} {"May"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
-
-%</abr>
-%</!babel>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit
-% translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be
-% defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic
-% language selection.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*babel>
- % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex.
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}
-{ "\bbland{}"}
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
-{ "\bbletal{}"}
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
-%<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" }
-%<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
-%<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" }
-%<ed>{ "\bbled{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
-{ "\bbledby{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
-%<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" }
-%<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
-%<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" }
-%<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}
-{ "\bblof{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}
-%<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" }
-%<abr>{ "\bblno{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
-{ "\bblno{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}
-{ "\bblin{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" }
-%<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}
-%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" }
-%<pp>{ "\bblp{}" }
-%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
-%<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" }
-%<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
-%<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" }
-%<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
-{ "\bblmthesis{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
-{ "\bblphdthesis{}" }
-
-%<*revdata>
-FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
-{ "\bbleidpp{}" }
-
-%</revdata>
-%<*!xedn>
-FUNCTION {bbl.first}
-%<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" }
-%<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.second}
-%<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" }
-%<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.third}
-%<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" }
-%<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
-%<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" }
-%<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
-%<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" }
-%<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}
-{ "\bblst{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
-{ "\bblnd{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
-{ "\bblrd{}" }
-
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}
-{ "\bblth{}" }
-
-%</!xedn>
-MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"}
-
-MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"}
-
-MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"}
-
-MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"}
-
-MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"}
-
-MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"}
-
-MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"}
-
-MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"}
-
-MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"}
-
-MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"}
-
-MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"}
-
-MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"}
-
-%</babel>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'}
-% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
-% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
-% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
-% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
-% languages.
-%
-% This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes
-% English. This means that the language definition files must also provide
-% for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
-FUNCTION {eng.ord}
-{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
- #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
- { bbl.th * }
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
- duplicate$ "1" =
- { pop$ bbl.st * }
- { duplicate$ "2" =
- { pop$ bbl.nd * }
- { "3" =
- { bbl.rd * }
- { bbl.th * }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!exlang>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!tail>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!head>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!jabr>
-MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
-
-MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
-
-MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
-
-MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
-
-MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
-
-MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
-
-MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
-
-MACRO {ieeetcad}
- {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
-
-MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
-
-MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
-
-MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
-
-MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
-
-MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
-
-MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
-
-MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
-
-MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
-
-MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
-
-MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
-
-MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
-
-MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
-%</!jabr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik
-% ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*jabr>
-MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
-
-MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
-
-MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
-
-MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
-
-MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
-
-MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
-
-MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
-
-MACRO {ieeetcad}
- {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
-
-MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
-
-MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
-
-MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
-
-MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
-
-MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
-
-MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
-
-MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
-
-MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
-
-MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
-
-MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
-
-MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
-
-MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
-
-%</jabr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'}
-% Define functions that encapsulate the argument
-% in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the
-% bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer
-% program to parse the |\bibitem| contents.
-%
-% The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries
-% is accessed for output; these are the points where
-% the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions
-% are called.
-% \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{author} ]\texttt{format.names}
-% \item[ \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors}
-% \item[ \texttt{editor} ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle})
-% \item[ \texttt{eid} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages}
-% \item[ \texttt{isbn} ]\texttt{format.isbn}
-% \item[ \texttt{issn} ]\texttt{format.issn}
-% \item[ \texttt{journal} ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article
-% \item[ \texttt{numpages} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid}
-% \item[ \texttt{organization} ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual}
-% \item[ \texttt{pages} ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings})
-% \item[ \texttt{publisher} ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings})
-% \item[ \texttt{title} ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order}
-% \item[ \texttt{volume} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
-% \item[ \texttt{year} ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub}
-% \item[ \texttt{booktitle} ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
-% \item[ \texttt{howpublished} ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc}
-% \item[ \texttt{edition} ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition}
-% \item[ \texttt{institution} ]\texttt{techreport}
-% \item[ \texttt{school} ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}
-% \item[ \texttt{address} ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport}
-% \item[ \texttt{chapter} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}
-% \item[ \texttt{number} ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
-% \item[ \texttt{series} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
-% \item[ \texttt{type} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
-% \item[ \texttt{month} ]\texttt{format.date}
-% \item[ \texttt{note} ]\texttt{format.note}
-% \item[ \texttt{annote} ]\texttt{fin.entry}
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{url} ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url})
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\doi}}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{doi} ]\texttt{format.doi} (\texttt{\char`\\doi})
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{eprint} ]\texttt{format.eprint}
-% \item[ \texttt{archive} ]\texttt{format.eprint}
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{key} ]cite key
-% \item[ \texttt{language} ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage}
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field}
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[ \texttt{date} ]\texttt{format.date}
-% \end{description}
-%
-% Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$}
-% and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving
-% a warning if either is the case.
-%
-% If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|.
-% The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option:
-% if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object.
-%
-% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
-%
-% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
-% Side effect: warning.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
-{ swap$
- duplicate$ missing$
- {
-%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
-%<!bibinfo.warning> pop$ pop$
- ""
- }
- { duplicate$ empty$
- {
-%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
-%<!bibinfo.warning> swap$ pop$
- }
- { swap$
-%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
-%<!bibinfo> pop$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'}
-% Replaces \texttt{output.check}
-% with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}.
-%
-% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
-%
-% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
-%
-% Side effect: warning if the field is empty.
-% Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect,
-% then no encapsulation is done.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
-{ swap$
- duplicate$ missing$
- {
- swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
- ""
- }
- { duplicate$ empty$
- {
- swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
- }
- { swap$
-%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
-%<!bibinfo> pop$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'}
-% The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field.
-%
-% If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function
-% encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|.
-%
-% \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*eprint>
-FUNCTION {format.eprint}
-{ eprint duplicate$ empty$
- 'skip$
- { "\eprint"
- archive empty$
- 'skip$
- { "[" * archive * "]" * }
- if$
- "{" * swap$ * "}" *
- }
- if$
-}
-%</eprint>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`write.url'}
-% This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard}
-% bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line
-% after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly
-% differently.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
-FUNCTION {write.url}
-%<*!html>
-{
-%<*url-doi&url>
- doi empty$
- { url }
- { "http://dx.doi.org/" doi * }
- if$
-%</url-doi&url>
-%<!url-doi|!url> url
- duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ }
-%<harnm> { "\newline\harvardurl{" swap$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
-%<!harnm&url-nl> { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" swap$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
- if$
-}
-%</!html>
-%<*html>
-{
-%<*url-doi&url>
- doi empty$
- { url }
- { "http://dx.doi.org/" doi * }
- if$
-%</url-doi&url>
-%<!url-doi|!url> url
- duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ }
- { duplicate$ "<br><a href=" quote$ * swap$ * quote$
- * ">" * swap$ * "</a>" * write$ newline$ }
- if$
-}
-%</html>
-
-%</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.url'}
-% This function is reworked for \texttt{\filename} to provide a
-% cleaner URL for DOIs. The definition of \cmd{\urldoi} is written in
-% the \texttt{.bbl} file by the function \texttt{begin.bib}. When the
-% package \pkg{hyperref} is loaded, the \meta{doi} is a hyperlink to
-% \texttt{https://doi.org/\meta{doi}}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
-FUNCTION {format.url}
-{
-%<url-doi&url> doi empty$
-%<url-doi&url> {
- url
- duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "" }
-%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" swap$ * "}" * }
-%<html> {
-%<html> duplicate$ "<a href=" quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *
-%<html> ">" * swap$ * "</a>" *
-%<html> }
- if$
-%<*url-doi&url>
- }
- {
- doi
-%<!html> "\doiprefix\urldoi{" swap$ * "}" *
-%<html> duplicate$ "doi:<a href=" quote$ * "https://doi.org/" *
-%<html> swap$ * quote$ * ">" * swap$ * "</a>" *
- }
- if$
-%</url-doi&url>
-}
-
-%</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'}
-% The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which
-% author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's
-% name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font
-% is specified, all names are the same.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
-
-%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
-FUNCTION {check.speaker}
-{ key empty$ 'skip$
- { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
- {
-%<pres-bf> bolden
-%<pres-it&!pres-bf> emphasize
-%<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf> scaps
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{`format.names'}
-% The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses
-% |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed
-% at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which
-% need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option.
-% This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from
-% this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means
-% if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand|
-% in the document for the language being used.
-%
-% The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior
-% to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as
-% Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the
-% AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a
-% good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an
-% option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older
-% versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new
-% feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst}
-% files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first
-% name.
-%
-% |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the
-% names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called
-% for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack
-% just before the call.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-STRINGS { bibinfo}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
-% one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
-%
-% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.names}
-{ 'bibinfo :=
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
- 's :=
- "" 't :=
- #1 'nameptr :=
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames 'namesleft :=
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { s nameptr
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special
-% font, or when the entire name set in a single special font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
-%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
-%<nm-init> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-init>
-%<nm-rev&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}"
-%<nm-rev&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-rev>
-%<nm-rv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}"
-%<nm-rv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rv>
-%<nm-rvx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}"
-%<nm-rvx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvx>
-%<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}"
-%<nm-rvcx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvcx>
-%<nm-rvv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}"
-%<nm-rvv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvv>
-%<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}"
-%<nm-rvvc&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvvc>
-%<nm-revf&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}"
-%<nm-revf&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-revf>
- "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
-%</!nm-revf>
-%</!nm-rvvc>
-%</!nm-rvv>
-%</!nm-rvcx>
-%</!nm-rvx>
-%</!nm-rv>
-%</!nm-rev>
-%</!nm-init>
-%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
-%<*nm-rev1>
- duplicate$ #1 >
- { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
-%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" }
-%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" }
- if$
-%</nm-rev1>
-%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
- duplicate$ #1 >
- { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
-%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
-%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" }
- if$
-%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
- format.name$
-%<nm-rv|nm-rvx> remove.dots
-%<nmft&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
-%</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are
-% set in (possibly different) special fonts.
-%
-% The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
-%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
-%<*nm-init>
- "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-init>
-%<*!nm-init>
-%<*nm-rev>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rev>
-%<*!nm-rev>
-%<*nm-rv>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{~}}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f{~}}{ jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rv>
-%<*!nm-rv>
-%<*nm-rvx>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{}}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{ jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvx>
-%<*!nm-rvx>
-%<*nm-rvcx>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{}}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvcx>
-%<*!nm-rvcx>
-%<*nm-rvv>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{.}.}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{ jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvv>
-%<*!nm-rvv>
-%<*nm-rvvc>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{.}.}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvvc>
-%<*!nm-rvvc>
-%<*nm-revf>
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}"
-%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-revf>
-%<*!nm-revf>
- "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</!nm-revf>
-%</!nm-rvvc>
-%</!nm-rvv>
-%</!nm-rvcx>
-%</!nm-rvx>
-%</!nm-rv>
-%</!nm-rev>
-%</!nm-init>
-%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
-%<*nm-rev1>
- nameptr #1 >
- { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}"
-%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%</nm-rev1>
-%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
- nameptr #1 >
- { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
- s nameptr
-%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}"
-%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}"
- format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
- *
-%</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
- bibinfo bibinfo.check
-%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
- type$ "presentation" =
- { check.speaker }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc>
- 't :=
- nameptr #1 >
- {
-%<*nmlm>
-%<m1> nameptr #1
-%<m2> nameptr #2
-%<m3> nameptr #3
-%<m4> nameptr #4
-%<m5> nameptr #5
-%<m6> nameptr #6
-%<m7> nameptr #7
-%<m8> nameptr #8
-%<m9> nameptr #9
-%<m0> nameptr #0
-%<m10> #10 +
-%<m20> #20 +
-%<m30> #30 +
-%<m40> #40 +
-%<m50> #50 +
-%<m60> #60 +
-%<m70> #70 +
-%<m80> #80 +
-%<m90> #90 +
- #1 + =
-%<x1> numnames #1
-%<x2> numnames #2
-%<x3> numnames #3
-%<x4> numnames #4
-%<x5> numnames #5
-%<x6> numnames #6
-%<x7> numnames #7
-%<x8> numnames #8
-%<x9> numnames #9
-%<x0> numnames #0
-%<x10> #10 +
-%<x20> #20 +
-%<x30> #30 +
-%<x40> #40 +
-%<x50> #50 +
-%<x60> #60 +
-%<x70> #70 +
-%<x80> #80 +
-%<x90> #90 +
- > and
- { "others" 't :=
- #1 'namesleft := }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</nmlm>
- namesleft #1 >
-%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * }
-%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * }
-%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * }
- {
- s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
- { 't := }
- { pop$ }
- if$
-%<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," *
-%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" *
-%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" *
-%<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
- numnames #2 >
-%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and
-%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * }
-%<aunm-semi> { ";" * }
-%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
- t "others" =
- {
-%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
-%<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
- }
-%<*!xand>
- {
-%<*!harnm>
-%<!amper> bbl.and
-%<amper> "\&"
-%</!harnm>
-%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
-%<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font
- space.word * t *
- }
-%</!xand>
-%<xand> { " " * t * }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- 't
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
-%<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { bib.name.font }
- if$
-%</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
- } if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'}
-% When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the
-% names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections,
-% where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is
-% normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option
-% \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly
-% like those of authors, being reversed if necessary.
-%
-% The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more
-% logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like
-% authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is
-% selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save
-% programming memory.
-%
-% The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default
-% when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore
-% it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default,
-% has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it.
-%
-% The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or
-% slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not
-% selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors
-% are to be formatted the same.
-%
-% This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code
-% which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first
-% followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed;
-% and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}.
-%
-% Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
-% with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
-%
-% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
-{
-%<ed-rev|ed-au> format.names
-%<*!ed-rev&!ed-au>
- 'bibinfo :=
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
- 's :=
- "" 't :=
- #1 'nameptr :=
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames 'namesleft :=
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { s nameptr
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
-%<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
-%<nm-revv1> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
-%<*!nm-revv1>
-%<nm-rv> "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rv>
-%<nm-rvx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvx>
-%<nm-rvcx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvcx>
-%<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
-%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
- "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
-%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
-%</!nm-rvcx>
-%</!nm-rvx>
-%</!nm-rv>
-%</!nm-revv1>
-%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
- format.name$
-%<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> remove.dots
-%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
-%</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Editor first and last name handled separately.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
-%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
- "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
-%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
-%<*nm-revv1>
- "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-revv1>
-%<*!nm-revv1>
-%<*nm-rv>
- "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rv>
-%<*!nm-rv>
-%<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
- "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
-%<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
-%<*nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>
- "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>
-%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
- "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
- if$
- s nameptr
- "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
- s nameptr
- "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
- if$
-%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
-%</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
-%</!nm-rv>
-%</!nm-revv1>
-%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
- *
-%</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
- bibinfo bibinfo.check
- 't :=
- nameptr #1 >
- {
- namesleft #1 >
-%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * }
-%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * }
-%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * }
- {
- s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
- { 't := }
- { pop$ }
- if$
-%<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," *
-%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" *
-%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" *
-%<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
- numnames #2 >
-%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and
-%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * }
-%<aunm-semi> { ";" * }
-%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
- t "others" =
- {
-
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
-%<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
- }
-%<*!xand>
- {
-%<*!harnm>
-%<!amper> bbl.and
-%<amper> "\&"
-%</!harnm>
-%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font
- space.word * t *
- }
-%</!xand>
-%<xand> { " " * t * }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- 't
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
-%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { bib.name.font }
- if$
-%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
- } if$
-%</!ed-rev&!ed-au>
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.key'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {format.key}
-{ empty$
- { key field.or.null }
- { "" }
- if$
-}
-
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.authors'}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.authors}
-{ author "author" format.names
-%<*revdata>
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
- if$
- *
- }
- if$
-%</revdata>
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'}
-% Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
-{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.editors'}
-% The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses.
-% In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option
-% \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs},
-% this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions.
-% Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is
-% some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}:
-% the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is
-% also called.
-%
-% Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle};
-% the two should be kept coordinated.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.editors}
-{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," *
- " " *
- get.bbl.editor
-%<bkedcap> capitalize
-%<edpar|edparc|edparxc> "(" swap$ * ")" *
- *
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'}
-% See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above.
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pg-bk>
-FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
-{ pages "pages" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { " " * bbl.pages * }
- if$
-}
-%</pg-bk>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*isbn>
-FUNCTION {format.isbn}
-{ isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- "ISBN " swap$ *
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</isbn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.issn'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*issn>
-FUNCTION {format.issn}
-{ issn "issn" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- "ISSN " swap$ *
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</issn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.doi'}
-% DOIs like URLs are encapsulated by their own commands, so need no \texttt{bibinfo.check}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*doi|(url-doi&!url)>
-FUNCTION {format.doi}
-{ doi empty$
- { "" }
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<!html> "\doi{" doi * "}" *
-%<html> "doi:" doi *
- }
- if$
-}
-%</doi|(url-doi&!url)>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`select.language'}
-% The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the
-% University of Freiburg.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lang>
-FUNCTION {select.language}
-{ duplicate$ empty$
- 'pop$
- { language empty$
- 'skip$
- { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</lang>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.note'}
-% Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own.
-% However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence,
-% the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper
-% noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces
-% with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading
-% character is an opening brace.
-%
-% With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and
-% added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This
-% means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that
-% sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.note}
-{
-%<*url-nt&!revdata>
- url empty$
- 'skip$
-%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output }
-%<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
-%<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * output }
- if$
-%</url-nt&!revdata>
- note empty$
- { "" }
- { note #1 #1 substring$
- duplicate$ "{" =
- 'skip$
- { output.state mid.sentence =
- { "l" }
- { "u" }
- if$
- change.case$
- }
- if$
- note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
- }
- if$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.title'}
-% For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote.
-% Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside.
-% Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes
-% outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com})
-% is added outside only when punctuation is absent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.title}
-{ title
-%<*!atit-u>
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { "t" change.case$ }
- if$
-%</!atit-u>
- "title" bibinfo.check
-%<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<tit-it> emphasize
-%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
- "\enquote{" swap$ *
-%<*!qx>
-%<*blk-com>
- non.stop
-%<!com-semi&!com-blank> { ",} " * }
-%<com-semi> { ";} " * }
-%<!com-semi&com-blank> { "} " * }
- { "} " * }
- if$
-%</blk-com>
-%<!blk-com> add.period$ "}" *
-%</!qx>
-%<*qx>
-%<*blk-com>
-%<!com-semi&!com-blank> "}, " *
-%<com-semi> "}; " *
-%<!com-semi&com-blank> "} " *
-%</blk-com>
-%<!blk-com> "}" *
-%</qx>
-%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
-%<lang> select.language
- }
- if$
-%</tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'}
-% For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas
-% between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present,
-% so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This
-% is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but
-% only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after
-% titles are output.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*blk-com&tit-qq>
-FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
-{ title empty$
- 'skip$
- { before.all 'output.state := }
- if$
-}
-%</blk-com&tit-qq>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'}
-% Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of
-% proceedings and collections are quoted, and if
-% neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected
-% (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run).
-% These options add text after the booktitle,
-% so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor!
-%
-% Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}
-% has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been.
-% Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still
-% on the stack?
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bt-qq>
-FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle}
-{ booktitle empty$
- 'skip$
-%<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc> { before.all 'output.state := }
-%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
- { editor empty$
- { before.all 'output.state := }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
-%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
- if$
-}
-%</bt-qq>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'}
-% In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label}
-% and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string
-% \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list.
-% However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an
-% earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string
-% \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on
-% my system. Author lists were truncated. Thus, \texttt{make.full.names}
-% is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the
-% \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This
-% involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially
-% \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*har|cay|nat>
-FUNCTION {format.full.names}
-{'s :=
- "" 't :=
- #1 'nameptr :=
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames 'namesleft :=
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { s nameptr
-%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<*jnrlab>
-%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
-%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
-%</jnrlab>
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- 't :=
- nameptr #1 >
- {
-%<*nmlm>
-%<m1> nameptr #1
-%<m2> nameptr #2
-%<m3> nameptr #3
-%<m4> nameptr #4
-%<m5> nameptr #5
-%<m6> nameptr #6
-%<m7> nameptr #7
-%<m8> nameptr #8
-%<m9> nameptr #9
-%<m0> nameptr #0
-%<m10> #10 +
-%<m20> #20 +
-%<m30> #30 +
-%<m40> #40 +
-%<m50> #50 +
-%<m60> #60 +
-%<m70> #70 +
-%<m80> #80 +
-%<m90> #90 +
- #1 + =
-%<x1> numnames #1
-%<x2> numnames #2
-%<x3> numnames #3
-%<x4> numnames #4
-%<x5> numnames #5
-%<x6> numnames #6
-%<x7> numnames #7
-%<x8> numnames #8
-%<x9> numnames #9
-%<x0> numnames #0
-%<x10> #10 +
-%<x20> #20 +
-%<x30> #30 +
-%<x40> #40 +
-%<x50> #50 +
-%<x60> #60 +
-%<x70> #70 +
-%<x80> #80 +
-%<x90> #90 +
- > and
- { "others" 't :=
- #1 'namesleft := }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</nmlm>
- namesleft #1 >
- { ", " * t * }
- {
- s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
- { 't := }
- { pop$ }
- if$
- t "others" =
- {
-%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
-%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
- }
- {
-%<*!harnm>
-%<*!and-xcom>
- numnames #2 >
- { "," * }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</!and-xcom>
-%<!amper> bbl.and
-%<amper> "\&"
-%</!harnm>
-%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
- space.word * t *
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- 't
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
-%<*lab&!and-rm>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { cite.name.font }
- if$
-%</lab&!and-rm>
-}
-
-FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full}
-{ author empty$
- { editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- 'key
- if$
- }
- { editor format.full.names }
- if$
- }
- { author format.full.names }
- if$
-}
-
-FUNCTION {author.key.full}
-{ author empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- 'key
- if$
- }
- { author format.full.names }
- if$
-}
-
-FUNCTION {editor.key.full}
-{ editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- 'key
- if$
- }
- { editor format.full.names }
- if$
-}
-
-FUNCTION {make.full.names}
-{ type$ "book" =
- type$ "inbook" =
- or
- 'author.editor.key.full
- { type$ "proceedings" =
- 'editor.key.full
- 'author.key.full
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</har|cay|nat>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'}
-% A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets
-% are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any
-% problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but
-% only for the \texttt{nat} option.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
-{ newline$
-%<*!html>
-%<*ay>
-%<!har&!nat> "\bibitem[" write$
-%<!har&nat> "\bibitem[{" write$
-%<har> "\harvarditem" write$
-%<nmd> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$
-%<ast> "\protect\astroncite{" write$
-%<cay> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$
-%<cn> "\protect\citename{" write$
-%<!har> label write$
-%<har> make.full.names duplicate$ label =
-%<har> 'skip$
-%<har> { "[" label * "]" * write$ }
-%<har> if$
-%<har> "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$
-%<har> year duplicate$ empty$
-%<cn> ", }" year duplicate$ empty$
-%<cay|nmd|ast> "}{" year duplicate$ empty$
-%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear> { pop$ "" }
-%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear> { pop$ "????" }
-%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> 'skip$
-%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> if$
-%<har> extra.label * "}{" * write$
-%<cn> * extra.label * "]{" * write$
-%<cay|nmd|ast> * extra.label * "}]{" * write$
-%<alk> "]{" write$
-%<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)> ")]{" write$
-%<nat> ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
-%<nat> { pop$ }
-%<nat> { * }
-%<nat> if$
-%<nat> "}]{" * write$
-%</ay>
-%<!ay&!(cite|alph)> "\bibitem{" write$
-%<!ay&(cite|alph)> "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$
- cite$ write$
- "}" write$
- newline$
- ""
-%</!html>
-%<*html>
-%<*htdes>
- "<dt><strong><tt>" write$
- cite$ write$
- "</tt></strong></dt>" write$ newline$
- "<dd>"
-%</htdes>
-%<htlist&!htdes> "<li>"
-%<!htlist&!htdes> "<p>"
-%</html>
- before.all 'output.state :=
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`if.digit'}
-% Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers
-% to a separated number.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
-FUNCTION {if.digit}
-{ duplicate$ "0" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "1" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "2" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "3" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "4" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "5" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "6" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "7" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "8" =
- swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`n.separate'}
-% \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}
-% Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma
-% or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs.
-% No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {n.separate}
-{ 't :=
- ""
- #0 'numnames :=
- { t empty$ not }
- { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit
- { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }
- { #0 'numnames := }
- if$
- t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *
- t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- numnames #5 =
- { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$
- #3 global.max$ substring$
-%<pgsep-c> "," swap$ * *
-%<pgsep-p> "." swap$ * *
-%<pgsep-s&!html> "\," swap$ * *
-%<pgsep-s&html> " " swap$ * *
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- while$
-}
-%</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {n.dashify}
-{
-%<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> n.separate
- 't :=
- ""
- { t empty$ not }
- { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
- { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
- { "--" *
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- }
- { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
- { "-" *
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- }
- while$
- }
- if$
- }
- { t #1 #1 substring$ *
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- }
- if$
- }
- while$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`word.in'}
-% The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references
-% that are
-% contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a
-% colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are
-% to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains
-% in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as
-% sentences, then it must be capitalized.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {word.in}
-%<in-x>{ "" }
-%<*!in-x>
-%<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize
-%<in-col> ":" *
-%<in-it> emphasize
- " " * }
-%</!in-x>
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.date'}
-% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date
-% in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright|
-% in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm},
-% which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that
-% this overrides the other year formatting options, except for the preceding punctuation.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {format.date}
-{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
- {
-%<*!blkyear>
- "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
- pop$ "????"
-%</!blkyear>
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%<*aymth>
- month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
- 'skip$
- {
-%<dtrev> swap$
- " " * swap$
- }
- if$
- *
-%<mth-bare> remove.dots
-%</aymth>
-%<dtbf> bolden
- extra.label *
-%<*!harnm>
-%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
- before.all 'output.state :=
-%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" *
-%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state :=
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ *
-%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
-%</!harnm>
-%<*harnm>
- before.all 'output.state :=
- " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" *
-%<yr-col> ":" swap$ *
-%<!yr-col&yr-com> "," swap$ *
-%<!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state :=
-%<!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ *
-%</harnm>
-}
-%</ay>
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {format.date}
-{
-%<!xmth> month "month" bibinfo.check
-%<xmth> ""
- duplicate$ empty$
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
- { swap$ 'skip$
- { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }
- if$
- *
- }
- { swap$ 'skip$
- {
-%<showstack> month year
-%<!dtrev> swap$
- " " * swap$
- }
- if$
- *
-%<mth-bare> remove.dots
- }
- if$
-%<dtbf> bolden
-%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
- duplicate$ empty$
- 'skip$
- {
- before.all 'output.state :=
-%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" *
-%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ *
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state :=
-%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ *
- }
- if$
-%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.year'}
-% For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a
-% special formatter separate from the regular date formatter.
-% The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
-FUNCTION{format.year}
-{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
- { "empty year in " cite$ *
-%<ay&!blkyear> "; set to ????" *
- warning$
-%<ay&!blkyear> pop$ "????"
- }
- {
-%<!ay&jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" *
-%<!ay&!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" *
- }
- if$
-%<*ay>
- extra.label *
-%<jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" *
-%<!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" *
-%</ay>
-}
-%</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.btitle}
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<!btit-rm> emphasize
-%<lang> select.language
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {either.or.check}
-{ empty$
- 'pop$
- { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
-{ volume empty$
- { "" }
- { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix
- "volume" bibinfo.check * *
- series "series" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
-%<*!ser-vol>
- { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$
- emphasize * }
-%</!ser-vol>
-%<ser-vol> { emphasize ", " * swap$ * }
- if$
- "volume and number" number either.or.check
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.number.series}
-{ volume empty$
- { number empty$
- { series field.or.null }
-%<*num-xser>
- { series empty$
- { number "number" bibinfo.check }
- { output.state mid.sentence =
- { bbl.number }
- { bbl.number capitalize }
- if$
- number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
- bbl.in space.word *
- series "series" bibinfo.check *
- }
- if$
- }
-%</num-xser>
-%<*!num-xser>
- { output.state mid.sentence =
- { bbl.number }
- { bbl.number capitalize }
- if$
- number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
- series empty$
- { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ }
- { bbl.in space.word *
- series "series" bibinfo.check *
- }
- if$
- }
-%</!num-xser>
- if$
- }
- { "" }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`is.num'}
-% This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns
-% 1 if it is a digit, else 0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!xedn>
-FUNCTION {is.num}
-{ chr.to.int$
- duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
- swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`extract.num'}
-% This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a
-% number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains
-% no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert
-% \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is.
-% This is used by \code{convert.edition}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {extract.num}
-{ duplicate$ 't :=
- "" 's :=
- { t empty$ not }
- { t #1 #1 substring$
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- duplicate$ is.num
- { s swap$ * 's := }
- { pop$ "" 't := }
- if$
- }
- while$
- s empty$
- 'skip$
- { pop$ s }
- if$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'}
-% The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field
-% \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As
-% originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words
-% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit,
-% it is not so easy to translate, nor to
-% convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted.
-% This function carries out the translation, by changing
-% \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so
-% on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no
-% translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used
-% instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than
-% the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to
-% it.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {convert.edition}
-{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
- s "first" = s "1" = or
- { bbl.first 't := }
- { s "second" = s "2" = or
- { bbl.second 't := }
- { s "third" = s "3" = or
- { bbl.third 't := }
- { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
- { bbl.fourth 't := }
- { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
- { bbl.fifth 't := }
- { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
-%<!english&exlang> { s bbl.th * 't := }
-%<english|!exlang> { s eng.ord 't := }
- { edition 't := }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- t
-}
-%</!xedn>
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.edition'}
-% This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as
-% ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word
-% \textsl{edition}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.edition}
-{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<!xedn> convert.edition
- output.state mid.sentence =
- { "l" }
- { "t" }
- if$ change.case$
- "edition" bibinfo.check
- " " * bbl.edition *
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { multiresult }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
-{ 't :=
- #0 'multiresult :=
- { multiresult not
- t empty$ not
- and
- }
- { t #1 #1 substring$
- duplicate$ "-" =
- swap$ duplicate$ "," =
- swap$ "+" =
- or or
- { #1 'multiresult := }
- { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
- if$
- }
- while$
- multiresult
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.pages'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.pages}
-{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { duplicate$ multi.page.check
- {
-%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.pages swap$
- n.dashify
- }
- {
-%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.page swap$
- }
- if$
-%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> tie.or.space.prefix
- "pages" bibinfo.check
-%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> * *
-%<bkpg-par> "(" swap$ * ")" *
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`first.page'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*jpg-1>
-FUNCTION {first.page}
-{ 't :=
- ""
- { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
- { t #1 #1 substring$ *
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
- }
- while$
-}
-
-%</jpg-1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'}
-% Note: this function gets called with something on the stack.
-% It may be the volume and number.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
-{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
- { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
- {
-%<volp-sp> ": " *
-%<*!volp-sp>
-%<volp-blk> " " *
-%<*!volp-blk>
-%<volp-com> ", " *
-%<*!volp-com>
-%<volp-semi> "; " *
-%<!volp-semi> ":" *
-%</!volp-com>
-%</!volp-blk>
-%</!volp-sp>
-%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p> format.year * " " *
-%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc> format.year * ", " *
- swap$
-%<jpg-1> first.page
-%<!jpg-1> n.dashify
-%<*jwdpg>
- pages multi.page.check
- 'bbl.pages
- 'bbl.page
- if$
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
-%</jwdpg>
- "pages" bibinfo.check
-%<jwdpg> * *
- *
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'}
-%
-% This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number)
-% and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty.
-% Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}.
-%
-% For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number
-% is appended too.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
-{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
- { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<volp-sp> ": " *
-%<*!volp-sp>
-%<volp-blk> " " *
-%<*!volp-blk>
-%<volp-com> ", " *
-%<*!volp-com>
-%<volp-semi> "; " *
-%<!volp-semi> ":" *
-%</!volp-com>
-%</!volp-blk>
-%</!volp-sp>
- }
- if$
- swap$ *
-%<*revdata>
- numpages empty$ 'skip$
- { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix
- "numpages" bibinfo.check * *
- " (" swap$ * ")" * *
- }
- if$
-%</revdata>
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'}
-% Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the
-% journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be
-% more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I
-% do not like to do.
-%
-% The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and
-% sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries
-% that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to
-% \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages}
-{ volume field.or.null
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<jwdvol> bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
- "volume" bibinfo.check
-%<jwdvol> * *
- }
- if$
-%<vol-bf&!vol-2bf> bolden
-%<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it> emphasize
-%<jdt-v|jdt-vs> format.year *
-%<*!vnum-x>
- number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
- swap$ duplicate$ empty$
- { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
- swap$
-%<vnum-sp> "~(" swap$ * ")" *
-%<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm> ", " swap$ *
-%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr> ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ *
-%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h> ", \#" swap$ *
-%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b> " " swap$ *
-%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b> "(" swap$ * ")" *
- }
- if$ *
-%<!vol-bf&vol-2bf> bolden
-%</!vnum-x>
-%<*!pp-last>
- eid empty$
- { format.journal.pages }
- { format.journal.eid }
- if$
-%</!pp-last>
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
-{ chapter empty$
-%<!pp-last> 'format.pages
-%<pp-last> { "" }
- { type empty$
- { bbl.chapter }
- { type "l" change.case$
- "type" bibinfo.check
- }
- if$
- chapter tie.or.space.prefix
- "chapter" bibinfo.check
- * *
-%<*!pp-last>
- pages empty$
- 'skip$
- { ", " * format.pages * }
- if$
-%</!pp-last>
- }
- if$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'}
-% This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes.
-% If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already
-% exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that
-% |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bt-qq>
-FUNCTION {bt.enquote}
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- { "\enquote{" swap$ *
-%<*!qx>
- non.stop
- { ",} " * }
- { "}, " * }
- if$
-%</!qx>
-%<*qx>
- "}, " *
-%</qx>
- }
- if$
-}
-%</bt-qq>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'}
-% The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object
-% (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack.
-% It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
-% and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing
-% the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output.
-%
-% If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
-{
- booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check
-%<!bt-qq&!bt-rm> emphasize
-%<bt-qq> bt.enquote
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'}
-% Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in
-% parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly.
-% Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized.
-%
-% Notes on \dtx{} options:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb+(+ \\
-% \verb+ <default>+ \\
-% \verb+ |edby ( |edbyx |edbyy|edbyw[edcap])+ \\
-% \verb+ |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy )+ \\
-% \verb+ |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx )+ \\
-% \verb+)+
-% \end{quote}
-% \item
-% \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive
-% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
-% \item
-% \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive
-% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
-% \item
-% \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options.
-% \item
-% When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective
-% \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive.
-% It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of
-% \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect.
-% \item
-% \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases,
-% but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the
-% ``editor'' text entity.
-% \item
-% The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+
-% \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}.
-% This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by
-% a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases.
-% \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus
-% volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume}
-% from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
-{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
- {
-%<showstack>% btitle
-%<*ser-ed>
- format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
- { ", " swap$ * * }
- if$
-%</ser-ed>
- editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
- {
-%<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
-%<showstack>% btitle ednms
-%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," *
- " " *
- get.bbl.editor
-%<bkedcap> capitalize
-%<edpar> "(" swap$ * "), " *
-%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)> "(" swap$ * ") " *
-%<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)> ", " *
- * swap$
-%<showstack>% eds btitle
-%</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
-%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
-%<showstack>% btitle ednms
-%<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw> get.bbl.editor
-%<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)> bbl.edby
-%<edcap> capitalize
-%<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" *
-%<showstack>% btitle ednms ed
-%<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy> swap$ "," *
- " " * swap$ *
-%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed
-%<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" *
- swap$
-%<edby|edby-parc> "," *
- " " * swap$
-%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
-%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle)
- * }
- if$
-%<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle)
- word.in swap$ *
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {empty.misc.check}
-{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$
- month empty$ year empty$ note empty$
- and and and and and
-%<!seq-no|alph> key empty$ not and
- { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
-{ type duplicate$ empty$
- 'pop$
- { swap$ pop$
- "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
-{ number "number" bibinfo.check
- type duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ bbl.techrep }
- 'skip$
- if$
- "type" bibinfo.check
- swap$ duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
- { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'}
-% The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
-% done by command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
-{
-%<*!ay>
- key duplicate$ empty$
- { pop$
- journal duplicate$ empty$
- { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ }
- { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- { word.in swap$ * " " *}
- if$
-%</!ay>
-%<ay> word.in
-%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
-%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor}
-{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
- "editor" bibinfo.check
- editor num.names$ duplicate$
- #2 >
- { pop$
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
- "editor" bibinfo.check
- " " * bbl.etal
-%<etal-it> emphasize
- *
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't :=
- }
- { #2 <
- 'skip$
- { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
- {
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
- "editor" bibinfo.check
- " " * bbl.etal
-%<etal-it> emphasize
- *
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font
-%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't :=
- }
- {
-%<*!harnm>
-%<!amper> bbl.and space.word
-%<amper> " \& "
-%</!harnm>
-%<harnm> " \harvardand\ "
- * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font
- "editor" bibinfo.check
- *
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check }
- if$
-%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
-}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'}
-% The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
-% done by command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
-{ volume duplicate$ empty$
- { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
- pop$ word.in
- }
- { bbl.volume
-%<!(blk-com|blk-tita)> capitalize
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
- }
- if$
-%<*!ay>
- editor empty$
- editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
- or
- { key empty$
- { series empty$
- { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
- crossref * warning$
- "" *
- }
- { series emphasize * }
- if$
- }
- { key * }
- if$
- }
- { format.crossref.editor * }
- if$
-%</!ay>
-%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
-%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'}
-% The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
-% done by command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
-{
-%<*!ay>
- editor empty$
- editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
- or
- { key empty$
- { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$
- { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
- crossref * warning$
- }
- { word.in swap$ * }
- if$
- }
- { word.in key * " " *}
- if$
- }
- { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *}
- if$
-%</!ay>
-%<ay> word.in
-%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
-%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'}
-% Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}.
-%
-% \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both
-% are there, they are merged into one set.
-%
-% Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding
-% punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses.
-%
-% MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add
-% \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}.
-%
-% Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if
-% present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where
-% the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing,
-% but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This
-% complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have
-% the date included, all in parentheses.
-%
-% This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and
-% \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text
-% into the stack first.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
-{ 't :=
- ""
-%<*pub-date&!ay>
- year empty$
- { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</pub-date&!ay>
-%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
- address empty$ t empty$ and
-%<pub-date> year empty$ and
- 'skip$
- {
-%</!(pub-date&ay)>
-%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> add.blank "(" *
-%<*add-pub>
- address "address" bibinfo.check *
- t empty$
- 'skip$
-%</add-pub>
-%<*!add-pub>
- t empty$
- { address "address" bibinfo.check *
- }
- { t *
- address empty$
- 'skip$
- { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * }
- if$
- }
-%</!add-pub>
-%<*add-pub>
- { address empty$
- 'skip$
- { ": " * }
- if$
- t *
- }
-%</add-pub>
- if$
-%<*pub-date&!ay>
- year empty$
- 'skip$
- { t empty$ address empty$ and
- 'skip$
-%<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * }
-%<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * }
- if$
- year "year" bibinfo.check
-%<dtbf> bolden
- *
- }
- if$
-%</pub-date&!ay>
-%<*pub-date&ay>
- year duplicate$ empty$
-%<*!blkyear>
- { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
- pop$ "????" }
-%</!blkyear>
-%<*blkyear>
- { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$
- pop$ "" }
-%</blkyear>
-%<!dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * }
-%<dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * }
- if$
- t empty$ address empty$ and
- { * }
-%<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * }
-%<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * }
- if$
-%</pub-date&ay>
-%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> ")" *
-%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
- }
- if$
-%</!(pub-date&ay)>
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
-{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'}
-% This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value,
-% and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack
-% should be author or editor names for the current entry.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nmdash>
-STRINGS {oldname}
-
-FUNCTION {name.or.dash}
-{ 's :=
- oldname empty$
- { s 'oldname := s }
- { s oldname =
-%<*!au-col>
-%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" }
-%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" }
-%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" }
-%</!au-col>
-%<*au-col>
-%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" add.blank }
-%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" add.blank }
-%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" add.blank }
-%</au-col>
- { s 'oldname := s }
- if$
- }
- if$
-}
-
-%</nmdash>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`article'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {article}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
- format.date "year" output.check
- date.block
-%</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*!jtit-x>
- format.title "title" output.check
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*blk-tit|blk-tita>
-%<!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<tit-col> add.colon
-%</blk-tit|blk-tita>
-%</!jtit-x>
- crossref missing$
- {
- journal
-%<jxper> remove.dots
- "journal" bibinfo.check
-%<!jttl-rm> emphasize
-%<injnl> word.in swap$ *
- "journal" output.check
-%<jnm-x> add.blank
-%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
- format.date "year" output.check
- date.block
-%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
- format.vol.num.pages output
-%<doi&agu-doi> format.doi output
-%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
- }
- { format.article.crossref output.nonnull
-%<!pp-last> format.pages output
- }
- if$
-%<*pp-last>
- eid empty$
- { format.journal.pages }
- { format.journal.eid }
- if$
-%</pp-last>
-%<issn> format.issn output
-%<(doi|(url-doi&!url))&!agu-doi> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<*revdata>
- format.url output
-%</revdata>
- fin.entry
-%<harnm|url-nl> write.url
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`book'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {book}
-{ output.bibitem
- author empty$
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
-%<ay> editor format.key output
-%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col> add.blank
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
- }
- { format.authors output.nonnull
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
- crossref missing$
- { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
- crossref missing$
- { format.bvolume output
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<pre-edn> format.edition output
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
-%<pg-bk&pg-pre> format.book.pages output
- format.publisher.address output
- }
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
- format.book.crossref output.nonnull
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
- }
- if$
-%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
-%<pg-bk&!pg-pre> format.book.pages output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`booklet'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {booklet}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors output
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.title "title" output.check
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
- howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
-%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
-%<pg-bk> format.book.pages output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date output
-%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`inbook'}
-% The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of
-% the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages
-% to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be
-% no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now).
-%
-% The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some
-% special entries, like this one.
-%
-% Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained.
-% There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say
-% with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always,
-% even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway,
-% since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {inbook}
-{ output.bibitem
- author empty$
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
-%<ay> editor format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
- }
- { format.authors output.nonnull
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
- crossref missing$
- { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
- crossref missing$
- {
-%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
-%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
- format.bvolume output
-%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
- format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
-%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<pre-edn> format.edition output
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
-%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
- }
- {
-%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
- format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
-%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
- format.book.crossref output.nonnull
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
- }
- if$
-%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<*isbn>
- crossref missing$
- { format.isbn output }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</isbn>
-%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
- format.date "year" output.check
- date.block
-%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
-%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`incollection'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {incollection}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*!jtit-x>
- format.title "title" output.check
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%</!jtit-x>
- crossref missing$
- { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
-%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle
-%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
-%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
-%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<pre-edn> format.edition output
- format.chapter.pages output
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output
-%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output
-%<!pre-edn> format.edition output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
- }
- { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
- format.chapter.pages output
- }
- if$
-%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
- format.date "year" output.check
- date.block
-%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
-%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {inproceedings}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*!jtit-x>
- format.title "title" output.check
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%</!jtit-x>
- crossref missing$
- { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
-%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle
-%<*!pre-pub>
-%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
-%</!pre-pub>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
- publisher empty$
- { format.organization.address output }
- { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- format.publisher.address output
- }
- if$
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<*pre-pub>
- format.bvolume output
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
-%</pre-pub>
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
-%<issn> format.issn output
- }
- { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
-%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output
- }
- if$
-%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
-%<!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!pub-date> date.block
-%<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc> add.blank
- format.pages "pages" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
-%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`conference'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`manual'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {manual}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors output
- author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb
- organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
- format.edition output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-%</ay>
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {manual}
-{ output.bibitem
- author empty$
- { organization "organization" bibinfo.check
- duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
- { output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
- }
- if$
- }
- { format.authors output.nonnull }
- if$
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
- author empty$
- { organization empty$
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> address new.block.checka
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb
- organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
- }
- if$
- format.edition output
-%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date output
-%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'}
-% To format a master's thesis.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*!thtit-x>
-%<!thtit-a> format.btitle
-%<thtit-a> format.title
- "title" output.check
-%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%</!thtit-x>
- bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
- school "school" bibinfo.warn output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`misc'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {misc}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors output
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
-%<*ay>
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.title output
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%</ay>
-%<*!ay>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> title howpublished new.block.checkb
- format.title output
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> howpublished new.block.checka
-%</!ay>
- howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
-%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date output
-%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-%<!ay> empty.misc.check
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'}
-% To format a doctoral thesis.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {phdthesis}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<*!thtit-x>
-%<!thtit-a> format.btitle
-%<thtit-a> format.title
- "title" output.check
-%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%</!thtit-x>
- bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
- school "school" bibinfo.warn output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`presentation'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pres>
-FUNCTION {presentation}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors output
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.title output
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
- format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
- month "month" output.check
- year "year" output.check
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
- new.sentence
- type missing$ 'skip$
- {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
- if$
-%<*url-blk&!harnm>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm>
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-%</pres>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`proceedings'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {proceedings}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.editors output
- editor format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
- format.bvolume output
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
- publisher empty$
- { format.organization.address output }
- { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- format.publisher.address output
- }
- if$
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
-%<issn> format.issn output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-FUNCTION {proceedings}
-{ output.bibitem
- editor empty$
- { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- }
- { format.editors output.nonnull }
- if$
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.btitle "title" output.check
- format.bvolume output
-%<!numser> format.number.series output
- editor empty$
- { publisher empty$
-%<!numser> 'skip$
-%<numser> { format.number.series output }
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
- format.publisher.address output
- }
- if$
- }
- { publisher empty$
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
- format.organization.address output }
- {
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence
-%<numser> format.number.series output
- organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
- format.publisher.address output
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check
-%<isbn> format.isbn output
-%<issn> format.issn output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`techreport'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {techreport}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<trtit-b> format.btitle
-%<!trtit-b> format.title
- "title" output.check
-%<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence
-%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon
-%<!trnum-it> format.tr.number output.nonnull
-%<trnum-it> format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull
- institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output
- address "address" bibinfo.check output
-%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note output
-%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date "year" output.check
-%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`unpublished'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {unpublished}
-{ output.bibitem
- format.authors "author" output.check
-%<ay> author format.key output
-%<au-col> add.colon
-%<nmdash> name.or.dash
-%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output
-%<dt-beg> date.block
-%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.title "title" output.check
-%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title
-%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check
-%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output
-%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output
-%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.url output
-%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
-%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence
- format.note "note" output.check
-%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date output
-%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block
- format.date output
-%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
-%<eprint> format.eprint output
-%<revdata> format.url output
- fin.entry
-%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`default.type'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-READ
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay|alph|!seq-no>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`sortify'}
-% In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is
-% left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error,
-% because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away
-% with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year
-% listings.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {sortify}
-{ purify$
- "l" change.case$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { len }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`chop.word'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {chop.word}
-{ 's :=
- 'len :=
- s #1 len substring$ =
- { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
- 's
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'}
-% The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the
-% \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}.
-% Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no})
-% versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating
-% such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx.
-% I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von}
-% part of the name.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { et.al.char.used }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used}
-{ #0 'et.al.char.used :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
-{ 's :=
-%<*alf-1>
-%<!vonx> s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
-%<vonx> s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
- duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
- { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</alf-1>
-%<*!alf-1&alf-f>
-%<!vonx> s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$
-%<vonx> s #1 "{ll}" format.name$
-%</!alf-1&alf-f>
-%<*!alf-1&!alf-f>
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames #1 >
- { numnames #4 >
- { #3 'namesleft := }
- { numnames 'namesleft := }
- if$
- #1 'nameptr :=
- ""
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { nameptr numnames =
- { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
- { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
- #1 'et.al.char.used :=
- }
-%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
-%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
- if$
- }
-%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
-%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
- numnames #4 >
- { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
- #1 'et.al.char.used :=
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
-%<!vonx> { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
-%<vonx> { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
- duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
- { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
- }
- if$
-%</!alf-1&!alf-f>
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for
-% more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay&!mcite>
-FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
-{ 's :=
- "" 't :=
-%<!jnrlab> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<*jnrlab>
-%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
-%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
-%</jnrlab>
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- s num.names$ duplicate$
- #2 >
- { pop$
-%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
-%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't :=
- }
- { #2 <
- 'skip$
- { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
- {
-% %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
-%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't :=
- }
-%<*!harnm>
-%<*!amper>
- { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- * }
-%</!amper>
-%<*amper>
- { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- * }
-%</amper>
-%</!harnm>
-%<*harnm>
- { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- * }
-%</harnm>
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<*lab&!and-rm>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { cite.name.font }
- if$
-%</lab&!and-rm>
-}
-
-%</ay&!mcite>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author
-% before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating,
-% is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay&mcite>
-FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
-{'s :=
- "" 't :=
- #1 'nameptr :=
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames 'namesleft :=
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { s nameptr
-%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
-%<*jnrlab>
-%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
-%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
-%</jnrlab>
-%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font
- 't :=
- nameptr #1 >
- {
-%<mct-1> nameptr #2 =
-%<mct-2> nameptr #3 =
-%<mct-3> nameptr #4 =
-%<mct-4> nameptr #5 =
-%<mct-5> nameptr #6 =
-%<mct-6> nameptr #7 =
-%<mct-x2> numnames #2 > and
-%<mct-x3> numnames #3 > and
-%<mct-x4> numnames #4 > and
-%<mct-x5> numnames #5 > and
-%<mct-x6> numnames #6 > and
- { "others" 't :=
- #1 'namesleft := }
- 'skip$
- if$
- namesleft #1 >
- { ", " * t * }
- {
- s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
- { 't := }
- { pop$ }
- if$
- t "others" =
- {
-%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
-%<*!etal-it>
-%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
-%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal *
-%</!etal-it>
-%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
-%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font
- }
- {
-%<*!harnm>
-%<*!and-xcom>
- numnames #2 >
- { "," * }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</!and-xcom>
-%<!amper> bbl.and
-%<amper> "\&"
-%</!harnm>
-%<harnm> "\harvardand{}"
- space.word * t *
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- 't
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
-%<*lab&!and-rm>
- t "others" =
- 'skip$
- { cite.name.font }
- if$
-%</lab&!and-rm>
-}
-
-%</ay&mcite>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'}
-% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'}
-% \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'}
-% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'}
-% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'}
-% Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and
-% \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and
-% \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for
-% numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections.
-% This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for
-% author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical.
-% That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay|alph>
-FUNCTION {author.key.label}
-{ author empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
-%<ay> 'key
-%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { author format.lab.names }
- if$
-}
-
-FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
-{ author empty$
- { editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
-%<ay> 'key
-%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { editor format.lab.names }
- if$
- }
- { author format.lab.names }
- if$
-}
-
-%</ay|alph>
-%<*!ay&alph>
-FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label}
-{ author empty$
- { key empty$
- { organization empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { key #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { author format.lab.names }
- if$
-}
-
-FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label}
-{ editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { organization empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { key #3 text.prefix$ }
- if$
- }
- { editor format.lab.names }
- if$
-}
-
-%</!ay&alph>
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
-{ editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
- 'key
- if$
- }
- { editor format.lab.names }
- if$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
-{ type$ "book" =
- type$ "inbook" =
- or
- 'author.editor.key.label
- { type$ "proceedings" =
- 'editor.key.label
- 'author.key.label
- if$
- }
- if$
- 'short.list :=
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`calc.label'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {calc.label}
-{ calc.short.authors
- short.list
-%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)> "("
-%<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn> ", "
- *
- year duplicate$ empty$
-%<keyxyr> short.list key field.or.null = or
-%<(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "" }
-%<!(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "????" }
-%<!note-yr> { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ }
-%<note-yr> 'skip$
- if$
- *
- 'label :=
-}
-
-%</ay>
-%<*!ay&alph>
-FUNCTION {calc.label}
-{ type$ "book" =
- type$ "inbook" =
- or
- 'author.editor.key.label
- { type$ "proceedings" =
- 'editor.key.organization.label
- { type$ "manual" =
- 'author.key.organization.label
- 'author.key.label
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
- duplicate$
- year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$
- *
- 'label :=
- year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$
- *
- sortify 'sort.label :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {calc.short.label}
-{ calc.short.authors short.list
- 'label :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
-{ 's :=
- #1 'nameptr :=
- ""
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=
- numnames 'namesleft :=
- { namesleft #0 > }
- { s nameptr
-%<*xintls>
-%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}"
-%<vonx> "{ll{ }}"
-%</xintls>
-%<*!xintls>
-%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
-%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}"
-%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}"
-%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
-%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>
-%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}"
-%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}"
-%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>
-%</!xintls>
- format.name$ 't :=
- nameptr #1 >
- {
-%<*nmlm>
-%<m1> nameptr #1
-%<m2> nameptr #2
-%<m3> nameptr #3
-%<m4> nameptr #4
-%<m5> nameptr #5
-%<m6> nameptr #6
-%<m7> nameptr #7
-%<m8> nameptr #8
-%<m9> nameptr #9
-%<m0> nameptr #0
-%<m10> #10 +
-%<m20> #20 +
-%<m30> #30 +
-%<m40> #40 +
-%<m50> #50 +
-%<m60> #60 +
-%<m70> #70 +
-%<m80> #80 +
-%<m90> #90 +
- #1 + =
-%<x1> numnames #1
-%<x2> numnames #2
-%<x3> numnames #3
-%<x4> numnames #4
-%<x5> numnames #5
-%<x6> numnames #6
-%<x7> numnames #7
-%<x8> numnames #8
-%<x9> numnames #9
-%<x0> numnames #0
-%<x10> #10 +
-%<x20> #20 +
-%<x30> #30 +
-%<x40> #40 +
-%<x50> #50 +
-%<x60> #60 +
-%<x70> #70 +
-%<x80> #80 +
-%<x90> #90 +
- > and
- { "others" 't :=
- #1 'namesleft := }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%</nmlm>
- " " *
- namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
- { "zzzzz" 't := }
- 'skip$
- if$
-%<*seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc>
- numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and
- { "zz" * year field.or.null * " " *
-%<seq-labc> #1 'namesleft :=
- }
-%<seq-labc> { t sortify * }
-%<!seq-labc> 'skip$
- if$
-%</seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc>
-%<!seq-labc> t sortify *
- }
- { t sortify * }
- if$
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
- }
- while$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
-{ 't :=
- "A " #2
- "An " #3
- "The " #4 t chop.word
- chop.word
- chop.word
- sortify
- #1 global.max$ substring$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`author.sort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {author.sort}
-{ author empty$
- { key empty$
- { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
- ""
- }
- { key sortify }
- if$
- }
- { author sort.format.names }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
-{ author empty$
- { editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
- ""
- }
- { key sortify }
- if$
- }
- { editor sort.format.names }
- if$
- }
- { author sort.format.names }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`negate.year'}
-% This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its
-% complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used
-% to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
-FUNCTION {negate.year}
-{ year empty$
- { "99999" }
- { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$
- year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
- year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
- year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
- }
- if$
-}
-%</seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {editor.sort}
-{ editor empty$
- { key empty$
- { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
- ""
- }
- { key sortify }
- if$
- }
- { editor sort.format.names }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*seq-no>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { seq.num }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`init.seq'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {init.seq}
-{ #0 'seq.num :=}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {init.seq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
-{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
- #-1 #10 substring$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</seq-no>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
-% For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in
-% \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {presort}
-{ calc.label
- label sortify
- " "
- *
-%<*!seq-no>
- type$ "book" =
- type$ "inbook" =
- or
- 'author.editor.sort
- { type$ "proceedings" =
- 'editor.sort
- 'author.sort
- if$
- }
- if$
- #1 entry.max$ substring$
-%</!seq-no>
-%<*seq-no>
- seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
- seq.num int.to.fix
-%</seq-no>
- 'sort.label :=
- sort.label
- *
-%<seq-yr> " " * year field.or.null *
-%<seq-yrr&!seq-yr> " " * negate.year field.or.null *
-%<*!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
- " "
- *
- title field.or.null
- sort.format.title
- *
-%</!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
-%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> " " * cite$ *
- #1 entry.max$ substring$
- 'sort.key$ :=
-% "For " cite$ * ", sort.key=" * sort.key$ * warning$
-}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {author.organization.sort}
-{ author empty$
- { organization empty$
- { key empty$
- { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
- ""
- }
- { key sortify }
- if$
- }
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
- if$
- }
- { author sort.format.names }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort}
-{ editor empty$
- { organization empty$
- { key empty$
- { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
- ""
- }
- { key sortify }
- if$
- }
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
- if$
- }
- { editor sort.format.names }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {presort}
-%<*alph>
-{ calc.label
- sort.label
- " "
- *
- type$ "book" =
-%</alph>
-%<!alph>{ type$ "book" =
- type$ "inbook" =
- or
- 'author.editor.sort
- { type$ "proceedings" =
- 'editor.organization.sort
- { type$ "manual" =
- 'author.organization.sort
- 'author.sort
- if$
- }
- if$
- }
- if$
-%<alph> *
- " "
- *
-%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify
-%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify
-%<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph> *
- " "
- *
-%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph> swap$ *
- title field.or.null
- sort.format.title
- *
- #1 entry.max$ substring$
- 'sort.key$ :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-ITERATE {presort}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-SORT
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay|alph|!seq-no>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be
-% used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment
-% must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label.
-% Simply count the references and add this number as the argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% With computer-generated articles, it is possible to have more than 26 articles
-% in one year. It has finally occurred that the extra labels go beyond `z'.
-% The current code now allows for `aa', \dots `az', 'ba', \dots `zz'. This
-% code was provided by Joseph Wright (2007 Oct 10).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { last.extra.num last.extra.num.extended last.extra.num.blank number.label }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
-{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
- "" 'next.extra :=
- #0 'last.extra.num :=
- "a" chr.to.int$ #1 - 'last.extra.num.blank :=
- last.extra.num.blank 'last.extra.num.extended :=
- #0 'number.label :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {forward.pass}
-{ last.label label =
- { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
- last.extra.num "z" chr.to.int$ >
- { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
- last.extra.num.extended #1 + 'last.extra.num.extended :=
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- last.extra.num.extended last.extra.num.blank >
- { last.extra.num.extended int.to.chr$
- last.extra.num int.to.chr$
- * 'extra.label := }
- { last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := }
- if$
- }
- { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
- "" 'extra.label :=
- label 'last.label :=
- }
- if$
- number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
-{ "" 'longest.label :=
- #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label :=
- "" 'next.extra :=
- #0 'longest.label.width :=
- #0 'last.extra.num :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {forward.pass}
-{ last.sort.label sort.label =
- { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
- last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
- }
- { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
- "" 'extra.label :=
- sort.label 'last.sort.label :=
- }
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'}
-% The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit.
-% This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS
-% emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for
-% non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces.
-% The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which
-% authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for
-% the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense,
-% so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and
-% year.
-%
-% The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib}
-% styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical
-% citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to
-% be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous.
-% The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the
-% entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
-{ next.extra "b" =
- { "a" 'extra.label := }
- 'skip$
- if$
- extra.label 'next.extra :=
- extra.label
-%<xlab-it> emphasize
-%<*!html>
- duplicate$ empty$
- 'skip$
- { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
- if$
-%</!html>
- 'extra.label :=
-%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)> label extra.label * 'label :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
-{ next.extra "b" =
- { "a" 'extra.label := }
- 'skip$
- if$
- label extra.label * 'label :=
- label width$ longest.label.width >
- { label 'longest.label :=
- label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
- extra.label 'next.extra :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay&alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
-%<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay|alph>
-ITERATE {forward.pass}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-REVERSE {reverse.pass}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay|alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ay>
-FUNCTION {bib.sort.order}
-{ sort.label
- " "
- *
-%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify
-%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify
-%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc)> swap$
- *
-%<*!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
- " "
- *
- title field.or.null
- sort.format.title
- *
-%</!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
-%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> " " * cite$ *
- #1 entry.max$ substring$
- 'sort.key$ :=
-% "For " cite$ * ", bib.sort.key=" * sort.key$ * warning$
-%<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast> calc.short.label
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-ITERATE {bib.sort.order}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-SORT
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</ay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!ay&!alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-STRINGS { longest.label }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
-{ "" 'longest.label :=
- #1 'number.label :=
- #0 'longest.label.width :=
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}
-%<*!cite>
-{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=
- number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
-%</!cite>
-%<cite>{ cite$ 'label :=
- label width$ longest.label.width >
- { label 'longest.label :=
- label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
- }
- 'skip$
- if$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-ITERATE {longest.label.pass}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!ay&!alph>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'}
-% The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl}
-% file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography}
-% environment is invoked.
-%
-% Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously
-% named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so
-% propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {begin.bib}
-%<*!html>
-%<*!ay&alph>
-{ et.al.char.used
- { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ }
- 'skip$
- if$
- preamble$ empty$
-%</!ay&alph>
-%<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$
- 'skip$
- { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
- if$
-%<ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" *
-%<!ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" *
- write$ newline$
-%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
- "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
- "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$
- "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}"
- write$ newline$
- "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}"
- write$ newline$
- "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
-%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
-%<*!plntx>
-%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}"
-%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}"
-%</!plntx>
-%<*plntx>
-%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}"
-%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}"
-%</plntx>
-%<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
-%<!plntx> "\let\enquote\frquote"
-%<*plntx>
- "\def\guillemotleft{%"
- write$ newline$
- " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}"
- write$ newline$
- "\def\guillemotright{%"
- write$ newline$
- " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}"
- write$ newline$
- "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
-%</plntx>
-%</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
-%<!tit-it&tit-qq> write$ newline$
-%<umlaut> "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$
-%<em-ul> "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi"
-%<em-ul> write$ newline$
-%<*ay>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%<*har>
- "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$
- "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}"
- write$ newline$
-%</har>
-%</ay>
-%<*nmft&nmft-def>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax"
-%<plntx> write$ newline$
-%<plntx> " \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</nmft&nmft-def>
-%<*nmft&fnm-def>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax"
-%<plntx> write$ newline$
-%<plntx> " \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</nmft&fnm-def>
-%<*lab&lab-def>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax"
-%<plntx> write$ newline$
-%<plntx> " \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</lab&lab-def>
-%<*(url&!harnm)|eprint>
-%<*!plntx>
-%<nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}"
-%<!nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}"
- write$ newline$
- "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{}"
- write$ newline$
-%</!plntx>
-%<*plntx>
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
-%<nfss> " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi"
-%<!nfss> " \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi"
- write$ newline$
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</plntx>
-%</(url&!harnm)|eprint>
-%<*doi>
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
-%<*!plntx>
- " \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else"
- write$ newline$
- " \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</!plntx>
-%<*plntx>
- " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
- " \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else"
- write$ newline$
- " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
- " \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</plntx>
-%</doi>
-%<*url-doi&url>
- "\providecommand{\doiprefix}{doi: }"
- write$ newline$
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname href\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
- " \providecommand{\urldoi}[1]{#1}\else"
- write$ newline$
- " \providecommand{\urldoi}[1]{\href{https://doi.org/#1}{#1}}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</url-doi&url>
-%<*lang>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}"
-%<*plntx>
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax"
- write$ newline$
- " \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi"
-%</plntx>
- write$ newline$
-%</lang>
-%<*!plntx>
-%<*babel>
- "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$
- "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$
- "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$
-%</babel>
-%<*annote>
- "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%"
- write$ newline$
- " \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
- write$ newline$
- " \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}"
- write$ newline$
- "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%"
- write$ newline$
- " \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
- write$ newline$
- " \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}"
- write$ newline$
-%</annote>
-%</!plntx>
-%<*bibinfo>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</bibinfo>
-%<*eprint>
-%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}"
-%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi"
- write$ newline$
-%</eprint>
-}
-%</!html>
-%<*html>
-{
-"<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing</title></head>" write$ newline$
-"<body>" write$ newline$
-"<h2>Bibliography</h2>" write$ newline$
-%<htdes>"<dl>" write$ newline$
-%<!htdes&htlist>"<ol>" write$ newline$
-}
-%</html>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {begin.bib}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-ITERATE {call.type$}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{`end.bib'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-FUNCTION {end.bib}
-{ newline$
-%<!html> "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
-%<html> "</dl></body></html>" write$ newline$
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-EXECUTE {end.bib}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!head>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</!options&!driver&!bblbst>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English}
-% The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language
-% selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with
-% \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bblbst>
- % This is babelbst.tex for English.
- % It should serve as a model for other languages.
- % Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex)
- % and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex.
-\def\bbland{and} \def\bbletal{et~al.}
-\def\bbleditors{editors} \def\bbleds{eds.}
-\def\bbleditor{editor} \def\bbled{ed.}
-\def\bbledby{edited by}
-\def\bbledition{edition} \def\bbledn{edn.}
-\def\bblvolume{volume} \def\bblvol{vol.}
-\def\bblof{of}
-\def\bblnumber{number} \def\bblno{no.}
-\def\bblin{in}
-\def\bblpages{pages} \def\bblpp{pp.}
-\def\bblpage{page} \def\bblp{p.}
-\def\bbleidpp{pages}
-\def\bblchapter{chapter} \def\bblchap{chap.}
-\def\bbltechreport{Technical Report}
-\def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.}
-\def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis}
-\def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis}
-\def\bblfirst{First} \def\bblfirsto{1st}
-\def\bblsecond{Second} \def\bblsecondo{2nd}
-\def\bblthird{Third} \def\bblthirdo{3rd}
-\def\bblfourth{Fourth} \def\bblfourtho{4th}
-\def\bblfifth{Fifth} \def\bblfiftho{5th}
-\def\bblst{st} \def\bblnd{nd} \def\bblrd{rd}
-\def\bblth{th}
-\def\bbljan{January} \def\bblfeb{February} \def\bblmar{March}
-\def\bblapr{April} \def\bblmay{May} \def\bbljun{June}
-\def\bbljul{July} \def\bblaug{August} \def\bblsep{September}
-\def\bbloct{October} \def\bblnov{November} \def\bbldec{December}
-%</bblbst>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf
index af76f1c69e1..1cc15b18c7f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex
index 61d410f7a13..3ca3fda9b46 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex
@@ -59,16 +59,16 @@
%% page automatically.
\begin{englishabstract}
<Insert your English abstract here. The abstract should be concise
- --- up to 10 lines long --- and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much
- as possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations
- should be avoided.>
+ (up to 10 lines long) and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much as
+ possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations should
+ be avoided.>
\end{englishabstract}
\begin{frenchabstract}
<Insérer le texte du résumé en français ici. Le résumé doit être
- concis --- une dizaine de lignes --- et descriptif. Éviter autant
- que possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont
- fortement découragées et les citations sont à éviter.>
+ concis (une dizaine de lignes) et descriptif. Éviter autant que
+ possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont fortement
+ déconseillées et les citations sont à éviter.>
[We will supply a French abstract for those authors who
can't prepare it themselves.]
\end{frenchabstract}
@@ -102,9 +102,10 @@
<Free form text>
\end{supplement}
- %% DATA SHARING (optional - comment out if unused). Describe how to
- %% access data that you wish to share. Provide a permanent link such
- %% as a Document Object Identifier (DOI) or an URL.
+ %% DATA SHARING (mandatory). In accordance with the Expect Data
+ %% Sharing editorial policy of Wiley, make a statement about the
+ %% availability or absence of shared data. Provide a permanent link
+ %% such as a Document Object Identifier (DOI) or an URL.
\begin{sharing}
<Free form text>
\end{sharing}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex
index 78053a97542..1b5735334c1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex
@@ -61,18 +61,18 @@
%% la page de titre automatiquement.
\begin{englishabstract}
<Insert your English abstract here. The abstract should be concise
- --- up to 10 lines long --- and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much
- as possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations
- should be avoided.>
+ (up to 10 lines long) and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much as
+ possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations should
+ be avoided.>
[Un résumé en anglais sera fourni pour les auteurs qui ne peuvent
le préparer eux-mêmes.]
\end{englishabstract}
\begin{frenchabstract}
<Insérer le texte du résumé en français ici. Le résumé doit être
- concis --- une dizaine de lignes --- et descriptif. Éviter autant
- que possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont
- fortement découragées et les citations sont à éviter.>
+ concis (une dizaine de lignes) et descriptif. Éviter autant que
+ possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont fortement
+ déconseillées et les citations sont à éviter.>
\end{frenchabstract}
%% MOTS-CLÉS. Fournir une liste de mots-clés en ordre alphabétique.
@@ -106,10 +106,11 @@
<Texte libre>
\end{supplement}
- %% PARTAGE DES DONNÉES (optionnel - commenter si inutilisé).
- %% Expliquer comment accéder à des données de l'article mises à
- %% disposition. Fournir un lien permanent, comme un identificateur
- %% d'objets numériques (DOI) ou une adresse URL.
+ %% PARTAGE DES DONNÉES (obligatoire). Conformément à la politique
+ %% éditoriale «Expect Data Sharing» de Wiley, vous devez indiquer
+ %% les conditions de partage des données de recherche, ou l'absence
+ %% de celles-ci, le cas échéant. Fournir un lien permanent, comme un
+ %% identificateur d'objets numériques (DOI) ou une adresse URL.
\begin{sharing}
<Texte libre>
\end{sharing}